Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPOLICE EVIDENCE STORAGE/2009POLICE EVIDENCE STORAGE/ 2009 F—U. jQrLcA?_ Slt?�_eI2�oo6� llls�. is C_.', -Q ,CA orl —dye",, LI %_14 Cn C--CL- Qlt_rk, X61" SL _mil cqv_ 0- e I Z GA. Q c: ne, 14- con4ro-c-l- PO cs 1; s L- Q mm., b4 -Res v- 30 -A-W—CL ri;r�o_ T�o r ----- --- ---- - ----- 7L - ------ ------- ------ ------- -- potge 4 clver4i SQL n Ae 9;as7 r-) 12f 12� Vj I)AA) W-) - ------------- ---- - ------ ---------- .......... -- --- ------- ?J 2c(1) Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319)356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. 09 -232 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON JULY 28, 2009 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above - mentioned project is to be held on the 28th day of July, 2009, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above -named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above -named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 6th day of ATTEST: a �,� 2 e� z CLERK pwengtresXsetph -pol icestorage09. doc Resolution No. 09 -232 Page 2 It was moved by Hayek and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: x x x X x X x wpdata/glossary/resolution- ic.doc NAYS: O'Donnell the Resolution be ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Hayek O'Donnell Wilburn Wright 6 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356 -5047 RESOLUTION NO. 09 -257 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above -named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above -named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above - named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above -named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above -named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 2:00 p.m. on the 3`d day of September, 2009. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 15th day of September, 2009, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 28th day of ATTEST: ea CITY ERK Pweng/res /app &s - policestorage.doc 2009 App oved bJ_/ City Attorney's Office 7 /17%c'S Resolution No. 09 -257 Page 2 It was moved by Champion and seconded by Correia the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: X x x x X x x wpdata/dlossary/resolution - ic.doc NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Hayek O'Donnell Wilburn Wright Publish 8/3 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:00 P.M. on the 3`d day of September, 2009. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 15th day of September, 2009, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: The remodeling of the lower level of the North Water Treatment Facility into secure storage and an office and restroom space for the Police Department. The work includes general building construction, and mechanical, and electrical work. There will be a mandatory prebid meeting at 9 a.m. on Tuesday August 11, 2009 on site in the meeting room at the North Water Treatment Facility at 80 Stephen Atkins Drive. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Howard R. Green Company, of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabula- tion of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: September 21, 2009; completion date: March 31, 2010 Liquidated Damages: $250.00 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Technigraphics, 125 S. Dubuque Street, Iowa by bona fide bidders. A $50.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics, 125 S. Dubuque Street, Iowa 52240; (319) 354 -5950. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242 -4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Printer's Fee $ 1 r� . 1'7 CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS- CITIZEN FED. ID #-42-0330670 g o A -5*f,vA-9 -rZ Hima4e@&", being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS- CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and . that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper ! . time(s), on the following date(s): DULY �d, �011q Legal Cl Subscribed and sworn to before me this / S � day of A.D. 20�. y Public' t_INDA K OTZ Commission Unber 732619 !�jy COmntISSIOn Expires January 27, 2011 .OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE OF PUBLIC ING ON PLANS, SPECIFICA',. FORM OF CONTRACT ANO E . RATED "COST FOR IOWA C POLICE STORAGE PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED, PERSON$, Public not it f9 an that . the City Cou_ of City, Iowa l . n },a Pgblic hearing ort 'plans `s fications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Iowa City Police Storage Projeolirlvd City at 7:00 p.m. on the 2$tl1 d. V of. July, 2009, said meeting te1aP°�Id in the Emma J. Harvat Half in may be inspected by.any interested persons. Any interested persons:may appear at said mee6no' of the City Council for the purpO$e.of#Wdngpbjections to and comments' ,ccinceming said plans, specifications, contract or -the cost of making said improvement. This notice is, INtLERK er of the Gity Council gwa City, 67932 July O 2009 TC01 - 13 Prepared by: Kumi Moms, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. 09 -306 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT. WHEREAS, Tricon General Construction of Dubuque, Iowa has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $331,900 for construction of the above -named project. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1. The contract for the construction of the above -named project is hereby awarded to Tricon General Construction, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above -named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The City Engineer is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above -named project. Passed and approved this 15th day of se mber , 20_0 - , / X ATTEST: -�y��� CI LERK City am It was moved by Wright and seconded by Hayek the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: X Bailey X Champion X Correia X Hayek X O'Donnell X Wilburn X Wright pweng \res \awrdcon- policeStorage.doc 9/09 Printer's Fee CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, . JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS - CITIZEN FED. ID # 42- 0330670 I, �D(sEfZ , ,cJ TZ Diann Berms, being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS- CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper . time(s), on the following date(s): Ayl 3 nil I Legal C k Sub ribed and sworn to before me this Y4"t day of A.D. 20. Notary Public -4 LJ.ca, LINDA KRnTZ o Commission Numoer 732619 My Commission Expires A." January 27, 2011 OFFICIAL PUBLICATION ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE JE Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:00 RM. on the 3rd day of September, 2009. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for pur- poses of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 15th day of September, 2009, or at a special meeting called for that pur- pose. The Project will involve the follow - ing: The remodeling of the lower level of the North Water Treatment Facility into secure storage and an office and restroom space for the Police Department. The work includes general building construc- tion, and mechanical, and electrical work. There will be a mandatory prebid meeting at 9 a.m. on Tuesday August 11, 2009 on site in the meeting room at the North Water Treatment Facility at 80 Stephen Atkins Drive. All work is to be done in strict com- pliance with the plans and specifi- cations prepared by- Howard R. Green Company, of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made pay -able to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY IOWA, and shall be for- feited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satis- factory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provi- sions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish, a bond in an amount equal to one hundred per- cent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a respon- sible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its comple- tion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: September 21, 2009; completion date: March 31, 2010 Liquidated Damages: $250.00 per day The plans, specifications and pro- posed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Technigraphics, 125 S. Dubuque Street, Iowa by bona fide bidders. A $50.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics, 125 S. Dubuque Street, Iowa 52240; (319) 354 -5950. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the con- tract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed sub - contractors, together with quanti- ties; unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documen- tation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's: A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the_- Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242- 4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products, and provisions grown and coal pro- duced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the con- tract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive techni- calities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City . Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK 78679 August 3, 2009 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa FORM OF PROPOSAL IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY Name of Bidder: , eQ41 C7WfkA C0nl (QA/ Address /1 Address of Bidder: dAgl i kla_ 61�D1 BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned,. proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete 1006- UT4 PV U (- E-- 6_)_0kACf2E1 PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawin s dated �( v including Addenda numbered _�_, and , inclusive, prepared by CLV" , for the Base Bid Lump Sum of : BASE BID Dollars ($ The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ ten percent (10 %) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: Add r Deduct the Sum of: Dollars ($ t qsd ) FORM OF PROPOSAL FP -1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa The following names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract. This list will not be read at the Bid Opening. Carpentry: Ci Coy\ $ HVAC: - La (-e-t,,) $ �(.1Pdo Plumbing: L.c- , re- c..1 $ • k °y Temp. Control: L— ck r-GUJ $ 1: ri kIU A G Electrical: (YVe- c -ik- (emsEtr $ Zci Tile: F(oo(i rt 4 $ FORM OF PROPOSAL FP -2 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before fA&1(YJ)Y\ 5� , Za(p Firm: 7PJNA 6 FA FROL COVSTAIA071 1 Q1% Signature: Printed Name: -P-,OA) Title: QtUA)EP, Address: dagS ke12 -N2 6LVJ -Sul'a OLMq au f. /- 5a Dol Phone: & 1 - 5 se- cI S/ L Contact: I PN I24C* W FORM OF PROPOSAL FP -3 FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ( "City "), and Tricon Construction Company ( "Contractor "). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the 15th day of September, 2009, for the Iowa City Police Storage Project ( "Project "), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incor- porated herein by reference: a. Addendum Number 1 (one); b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201 -1997, as amended; C. Plans; d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders; g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Restriction on Non - Resident Bidding on Non - Federal -Aid Projects; i. Contract Compliance Program (Anti- Discrimination Requirements); j. Proposal and Bid Documents; and k. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): See attachment. 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 5. The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of: Three Hundred and Seventeen Thousand Dollars ($ 317,000.00); City will also award Alternate #1: Alternate #1 in the amount of: Fourteen Thousand and Nine Hundred Dollars ($14,900.00) For a Total contract amount of: Three Hundred and Thirty -One Thousand and Nine Hundred Dollars ($331,900.00) DATED this 15th day of September 2009 (date of Council Award) by Council Resolution 09 -306. r , if" ATTEST: Mayor City Clerk Contractor I (Title) C�� ►�.tG�( PQD bw►�2. ATTEST: Title 9! (Company Official) Approved By: J11771 le 9 1114� 4/y, City Attorney's Office 1,1;z l q S1ENG\ARCHITECTURE FILE \Projects \Police Evidence Storage Project \FORM OF AGREEMENT City Police Storage Project 09 15 09.doc PROJECT NAME: IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE SUBCONTRACTOR LIST GENERAL CONTRACTOR: Tricon General Construction FEDERALID: 42- 1479598 STREET ADDRESS: 2245 Kerper Boulevard, Suite #2 CITY, STATE, ZIP: Dubuque, IA 52001 PHONE: (563) 588 -9516 FAX: (563) 588 -9519 SUBCONTRACTOR: Randy's Carpets & Interiors FEDERALID: 42- 1125168 SECTION & DESCRIPTION: 09 6101 Flooring CONTRACT AMOUNT: $3,425 STREET ADDRESS: 401 2nd St CITY, STATE, ZIP: Coralville, IA 52241 PHONE: (319) 354 -4344 FAX: (319)354 -8753 SUBCONTRACTOR: Vrban Fire Protection, Inc FEDERALID: 22- 3864147 SECTION & DESCRIPTION: 210101 Wet -Pipe Fire - Suppression Sprinklers CONTRACT AMOUNT: $23,970 STREET ADDRESS: 1714 5th St., Suite 1 CITY, STATE, ZIP: Coralville, IA 52241 PHONE: (319) 338 -7343 FAX: (319)338 -7874 SUBCONTRACTOR: Larew Co. Inc. FEDERALID: 42- 1203380 SECTION & DESCRIPTION: 22 0101 Mechanical CONTRACT AMOUNT: $128,700 STREET ADDRESS: PO Box 2980 CITY, STATE, ZIP: Iowa City, IA 52244 PHONE: (319) 337 -9681 FAX: (319)337 -7636 SUBCONTRACTOR: Merit Electric LTD FEDERALID: 42- 1163448 SECTION & DESCRIPTION: 26 0101 Electrical CONTRACT AMOUNT: $31,100 STREET ADDRESS: PO Box 1428 CITY, STATE, ZIP: Iowa City, IA 52244 PHONE: (319) 354 -5612 FAX: (319) 351 -0858 Bond No. 08875494 I Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND Tricon General Construction, Inc. 2245 Kerper Blvd., Dubuque, IA ,as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and Fidelity and Deposit Company (insert the legal title of the Surety) of Maryland , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Three Hundred Thirty One Thousand NinI9oI1Mnddrad00/100- ($ 331,900.00 ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety herebyWnd themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severalty D� W _M C-) WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of 9/15/09 , entered into a --1� (date) =gym -u M IC Police Storage o' written Agreement with Owner for Project; and ry WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and PaymeFl;rBond,dg be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by , which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed -upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; - - -- - - --- -- --- --- ----- -- -- - - -- - -- -- - ---- - - - - - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- ati --- ... -. - otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owners obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determination by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND PB -1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price;' as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of one ( 1 ) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporates 0 having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontractors, all clams due tWn -Tt for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose bens bOd VU is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extenft94 it wwe =tom rn expressly set out herein. 3rd February N SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF 1 20-):-- o IN THE PRESENCE OF: Tricon Gene r on ruction, inc. - -- --------- - - - - -- _ -_ -- - (Principal 'Rod Nc N7w - uhf-/ fitness (Title) of Maryland Fidelity and De osit Company ur To c aap, ney -in -Fact fitness (Title) 2626 49th Drive (Street) Franksville, WI 53126 ` (City, State, Zip) 262- 835 -9576 j (Phone) PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND PB- 2 EXTRACT FROM BY -LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice - President, or any of the Senior Vice - Presidents or Vice - Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice - Presidents, Assistant Vice - Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice - President who executed the said Power of Attorney was one of the additional Vice - Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice - President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Company this 3rd day of February ?010 Assistant Secretary N O O :>:� O rn Cd C-)-< .<r M M 0 Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, a corporation of the State of Maryland, by WILLIAM J. MILLS, Vice President, and ERIC D. BARNES, Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Company, are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date h e y nominate, constitute and appoint Thomas O. CHAMBERS and Todd SCHAAP, both of R O true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for ur i d deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, and the execution of suc in ese presents, shall be as binding upon said Company, as fully an �''�� is i ey had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regular_y �1I�14a �e(��t ice in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. The said Assist Section 2, of the E IN WITNESS affixed the Corp A.D. 2008. ATTEST: 'gyp 9EPOS�i _ •o 0 W ww set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article VI, j 4s now in force. �e said Vice - President and Assistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 5th day of March, State of Maryland I s: Baltimore County f FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND 4,_ Eric D. Barnes Assistant Secretary By: William J. Mills Vice President On this 5th day of March, A.D. 2008, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came WILLIAM J. MILLS, Vice President, and ERIC D. BARNES, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, and that the said Corporate Seal and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. O ' R. Uj LLJ LL W v i O t� Ls. 0 0 N POA -F 184 -0010 Dennis R. Hayden Notary Public My Commission Expires: February 15, 2013 STATE OF WISCONSIN ) COUNTY OF KENOSHA ) ON THIS 3rd day of February, 2010, before me, a notary public, within and for said County and State, personally appeared Todd Schaap to me personally known, who being duly sworn, upon oath did say that he is the Attorney -in -Fact of and for the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, a corporation of MARYLAND, created, organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of MARYLAND; that the corporate seal affixed to the foregoing within instrument is the seal of the said Company; that the seal was affixed and the said instrument was executed by authority of its Board of Directors; and the said Todd Schaap did acknowledge that he executed the said instrument as the free act and deed of said Company. Notary My Co -- isconsin ;, 2010 N a o �� d W ;; -n C")-< r 3 m 0� � N 4✓ O I r _I CITY OF IOWA CITY 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 -1826 (319) 356 -5000 (319) 356 -5009 FAX ENGINEER'S REPORT www.tcgov.org December 22, 2011 Honorable Mayor and City Council Iowa City, Iowa Re: IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT Dear Honorable Mayor and Councilpersons: I hereby certify that Tricon General Construction of Dubuque, Iowa has completed the construction of the Iowa City Police Storage Project in substantial accordance with the plans and specifications prepared by Howard R. Green Company of Cedar Rapids. The required performance and payment bond is on file in the City Clerk's office. The final contract price is $ 364,935.84. recommend that the above - referenced improvements be accepted by the City of Iowa City. Sincerely, lR "J.Q IGrz il. - Ron Knoche, P.E. City Engineer S:IENGVIRCHITECTURE FILEIProjeclsllowa City Police Storage ProjechEngineer's ReporLJowa City Police Storage Project 01 1011.doc 01-18 T 5d(5) Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. 12 -7 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Iowa City Police Storage Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Tricon General Construction of Dubuque, Iowa, dated September 15, 2009, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Evidence Storage Facility account #4421- 421700; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $364,935.84. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 10th day of January , 20_LL_ _fie MAYOR Approved by ATTEST: / � -) 7e CITY K City Attorney's Office It was moved by Champion and seconded by Millis - the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: x x X x x- X x pweng /res /policestorage- acptwork.doc 12/11 NAYS: ABSENT: Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton CITY OF IOWA CITY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA July 6, 2009 0 -n 1 0 > V1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Name of Bidder: Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa FORM OF PROPOSAL IOWA CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT EVIDENCE STORAGE PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response Requirements, coordination, the Drawings prepared by BASE BID to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and dated including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of : Dollars ($ ) The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ ten percent (10 %) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: } Alternate No. 1: Add or Deduct the Sum of: 0 Dollars ($ FORM OF PROPOSAL FP -1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa The following names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract. This list will not be read at the Bid Opening. Carpentry: $ HVAC: $ Plumbing: $ Temp. Control: $ Electrical: $ Tile: $ FORM OF PROPOSAL FP- 2 ©, ri .0 FORM OF PROPOSAL FP- 2 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before Firm: Signature: _ Printed Name: Title: FORM OF PROPOSAL FP- 3 Address: _per M Phone: Contact: �n FORM OF PROPOSAL FP- 3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa as Principal, and , as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, for Project. (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful perfor- mance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this day of A.D., 20 `^ C` { _- ($ea Witness Principal "" -.. v: W By - . ' (Ti c' a M (Se Surety p? By,� Witness Attornn -fact) Attach Power -of- Attorney BID BOND BB- 1 t Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J NO` 8►752 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa CERTIFICATION I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am ad stered Architect under the laws of the State of Lowad 07 bZ 0 Name: Lawren a D. Nie ow V AIA Dat License Number: 03752 My renewal date is: June Architectural - Divisions 1, 6, 7, 8. 2011 10 ESSIO ���� I hereby certify th t this engineering document was prepared by me or \`�� 4t�0••..•••••!,t i under y dir c ers I supervision a a duly licensed •titiS+yC�ii J Pro si r der ws of the State of Iowa. R. ROGER t S- i WHEAT = me: 9AKger Wheat, P.E. Da s 15110 License Number: 15110 , %V /ii10'W���� My renewal date is: December 31, 2009 C Mechanical — Divisions 13 and 15 ANDREW J. DIEDERICH 13858 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared wb e o under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licoi j '0 Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. NJ UT Name: Andrew iederich, P.E. Date License Number: IOW P My renewal date is: Electrical - Division 16 e 10 13858 December 31, 2010 K L C C C r v L r LPR r L Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Number TITLE SHEET SEALS PAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ................................................ ............................... PH -1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ................................................... ............................... AB -1 NOTICETO BIDDERS ............................................................... ............................... NBA INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS .................................................... ............................... I13-1 FORMOF PROPOSAL .............................................................. ............................... FP -1 BIDBOND .................................................................................. ............................... BB -1 FORM OF AGREEMENT ........... ............................... PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND ................................ ............................... CONTRACT COMPLIANCE w 0 (ANTI- DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) ...................... ............................... CC 0 GENERALCONDITIONS ........................................................... ............................... G(t_f sv SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ............................................ ............................... SC -1 RESTRICTION ON NON — RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON — FEDERAL —AID PROJECTS........................................................................... ............................... R -1 (y�'I 0 d11! F�i G [1 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J TECHNICAL SECTIONS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Section Title # of Pages DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 - Summary .......................................................................... ............................... 6 01140 - Work Restrictions ............................................................. ............................... 2 01230 - Alternates ......................................................................... ............................... 2 01250 - Contract Modification Procedures ................................... ............................... 3 01290 - Payment Procedures ....................................................... ............................... 6 01310 - Project Management and Coordination ........................... ............................... 9 01320 - Construction Progress Documentation ........................... ............................... 9 01330 - Submittal Procedures ...................................................... ............................... 10 01400 - Quality Requirements ...................................................... ............................... 8 01420 - References ....................................................................... ............................... 6 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................... ............................... 11 01524 - Construction Waste Management ................................... ............................... 6 01600 - Product Requirements ..................................................... ............................... 6 01635 - Substitution Procedures .................................................. ............................... 4 01700 - Execution Requirements ................................................. ............................... 9 01731 - Cutting and Patching ....................................................... ............................... 5 01732 - Selective Demolition ........................................................ ............................... 9 01770 - Closeout Procedures ....................................................... ............................... 6 01781 - Project Record Documents ............... — __ .................. ............................... �' "�' 4 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data :.�.�:....... 01820 - Demonstration and Training - DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105 - Miscellaneous Carpentry ........................................... .............................r. 7 u 1 06402 - Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION y 07841 - Through- Penetration Firestop Systems ........................................................... NJ v n3 DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames ................................................. ............................... 10 08710 - Door Hardware ................................................................ ............................... 13 08800 - Glazing ............................................................................ ............................... 7 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09111 - Non - Load - Bearing Steel Framing ..................................... ............................... 5 09250 - Gypsum Board ................................................................. ............................... 7 09310 - Ceramic Tile ..................................................................... ............................... 9 09511 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings ................................................. ............................... 6 09653 - Resilient Wail Base And Accessories ............................... ............................... 5 09680 - Carpet ............................................................................. ............................... 4 09912 - Interior Painting ................................................................ ............................... 5 09960 - High- Performance Coatings ............................................. ............................... 4 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10431 - Signage ............................................................................ ............................... 4 10522 - Fire Extinguisher Cabinets ............................................... ............................... 5 10801 - Toilet And Bath Accessories ............................................ ............................... 4 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13930 - Wet -Pipe Fire - Suppression Sprinklers ............................. ............................... 15 16902 - Electric Controls and Relays ............................................. ............................... 2 U31 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ....................... ............................... 8 15055 - Motors ............................................................................. ............................... 4 15060 - Hangers and Supports .................................................... ............................... 8 15071 - Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls .................... ............................... 4 15075 - Mechanical Identification ................................................. ............................... 4 15080 - Mechanical Insulation ....................................................... ............................... 17 15110 - Valves ............................................................................. ............................... 15140 - Domestic Water Piping .................................................... ............................... 5 5 15145 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties ................................... ............................... 2 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ...................................... ............................... 15155 - Drainage Piping Specialties .............................................. ............................... 6 4 15181 - Hydronic Piping ............................................................... ............................... 8 15183 - Refrigerant Piping ............................................................ ............................... 15185 - Hydronic Pumps .............................................................. ............................... 7 5 15410 - Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................ ............................... 9 ,4 15415 - Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers ........................................... .,........... 15738 - Split- System Air - Conditioning Units .............. ............................ O '= ... 15755 - Dehumidification Units .................................. ............................... .�, v 15815 - Metal Ducts ................................................................. .........................:..... '.� 15820 - Duct Accessories �1 `.. 15855 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles ................................. ........................�...... 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls ..............................................-0 - °= 15940 - Sequence of Operation & Points List .. ............................... e3........9 15950 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ................................ ..................>...........o 4 4 7 8 w� 7 l- 4J 170, 5 12 16902 - Electric Controls and Relays ............................................. ............................... 2 U31 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements ......................................... ............................... 10 16060 - Minor Electrical Demolition for Remodeling ..................... ............................... 2 16111 - Conduit ............................................................................ ............................... 6 16120 - Wires and Cables ............................................................ ............................... 16130 - Boxes ..... ............................... ................... ......................... ............................... 4 4 16141 - Wiring Devices .................................................................. ............................... 5 16190 - Supporting Devices .......................................................... ............................... 16440 - Disconnects ..................................................................... ............................... 3 3 16450 - Grounding and Bonding ................................................... ............................... 2 16475 - Overcurrent Protective Devices ....................................... ............................... 4 16500 - Lighting ............................................................................ ............................... 16740 - Miscellaneous Conduit System ........................................ ............................... 2 16852 - Fire Alarm System ............................................................ ............................... 5 16902 - Electric Controls and Relays ............................................. ............................... 2 U31 e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR IOWA CITY POLICE STORAGE PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Iowa City Police Storage Project in said City at 7:00 p.m. on the 28"' day of July, 2009, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING PH- 1 - 0, � M r, a Z-1- o• NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING PH- 1 IN Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa ■ ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:00 P.M. on the 3rd day of September, 2009. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 15"' day of September, 2009, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: The remodeling of the lower level of the North Water Treatment Facility into secure storage and an office and restroom space for the Police Department. The work includes general building construction, and mechanical, and electrical work. There will be a mandatory prebid meeting at 9 a.m. on Tuesday August 11, 2009 on site in the meeting room at the North Water Treatment Facility at 80 Stephen Atkins Drive. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Howard R. Green Company, of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract IL and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: ' Specified Start Date: September 21, 2009; completion date: March 31, 2010° Liquidated Damages: $250.00 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the C4ty�lerk.`gopiesef�- said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Technigraphia; 41;25 Subuque Street, Iowa by bona fide bidders. _< r. A $50.00 non - refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidder" �ther kjerest persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics, 125 S. Dubuque StreeQ, #' a 52 *0; (31 354 -5950. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors an?subconVctors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242 -4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregu- larities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS AB- 1 54�G 'Y, Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J NOTICE TO BIDDERS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Bid Bond Envelope 2: Form of Proposal 4. There shall be a mandatory pre -bid meeting for General Contractors on August 11, 2009 at 9:00 am at the North Water Plant meeting room, 80 Stephen Atkins Drive, Iowa City, Iowa. NOTICE TO BIDDERS NB- 1 �..a k. -. C" o >/��� V1 NB- 1 e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 2. Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. The bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner /Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", 1997 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder off& Ito p orm- the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to whichk mpy be- added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alterrI.I% bid. M D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to biboded "i:o or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding Mange iR the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. 'ate, E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the contract documents. F. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G. A sub - bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB- 1 e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3. The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. 2.4 The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4. Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of the Architect for the deposit sum as indicated. The deposit will be refunded to plan holders who return the bidding documents in good condition within 30 days after receipt of bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents, and his deposit will be refunded. Success sub- Aders, including material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, a� their deposit will be refunded if the Architect receives written notification within the : cndarl day period following receipt of bids. = i cr B. Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. I ither the Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility fo-r) �rror or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sett of bgding documents. No partial sets will be issued. 0- C. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D. Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documents may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are incorporated therein by reference. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB- 2 P Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa hi 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub - bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 Substitutions A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. Refer to AIA Substitutions form for substitution requirements. B. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bidssuch ro approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely Wn app�d)vals made in any other manner. 3.4 Addenda ~� cr A. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Archftecto h P6e a complete set of bidding documents. : ;;; era is B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever biAng documents are on file for that purpose. C. No addenda will be issued later than seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the proper location on the bid form. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS MW L. r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa ARTICLE 4 — BIDDING PROCEDURES 5. Form and Style of Bids A. Submit bids in duplicate on forms identical to the form bound into the project manual. Separate copies of the bid form are contained within the back cover of this document. B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. C. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govem. D. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E. All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter "No Change ". F. Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. G. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the ,site of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitty art�gent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the ager s- ,autFifflity t bind the bidder. H. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after rthe Cite o opening. 3—,l l == 2z 4.2 Bid Security > N) a A. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier's check, cash or certified check will not be an accepted bid bond. Ei INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB- 4 0 d Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Surety bond shall be written on enclosed "Bid Bond" form bound within the project manual and the attorney -in -fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. C. The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until either: 1. The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 4.3 Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB — Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving the bids ( "City Clerk, City of Iowa City "), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. 1. Location: Office of City Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 2. Time and Date: Before 2:00 pm Thursday, September 3, 2009. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. C. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery atk +V'�', to ion Il designated for receipt of bids. _..R t D. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive coristdera#pn. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid Q -0 A. rJ A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipul2Red time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or by telegram. If by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 113- 5 10 VX 4W ra Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to .K. Bidders. D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 — CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6. Opening of Bids A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. 5.2 Rejection of Bids A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the surri.of the- *-se bid and the accepted alternates. 0 ., '' ARTICLE 6 — POST -BID INFORMATION 7. Submittals A. The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for thiniard a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Architect:' cr 1. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. bi 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. 3. A list of names of the subcontractors or other persons or entities proposed for the principal portions of the work. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB- 6 [I r L 0 D u u 11 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. C. Prior to the award of the contract, the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder's option: 1. Withdraw the bid. 2. Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. D. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7 — PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 8. Bond Requirements A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract docu"ents. 7.2 The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds'° A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later tti462three (3) 9 days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work s td be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder , pr1% to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Ow that gUch bonds will be furnished and delivered. B. The bonds shall be written on the "Performance and Payment Bond" form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D. The bidder shall require the attomey -in -fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB- 7 M, L Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa ARTICLE 8 — PRE -BID CONFERENCE 9. Conference A. General Contractor bidding is required to attend a mandatory pre -bid conference on August 11, 2009, at 9:00 am local time, in the North Water Plant Meeting Room in Iowa City, located at 80 Stephen Atkins Drive. 8.2 Parking 1. Limited parking is available on site. S: \Eng\ARCHITECTURE FILE\Architecture Masterspecifications \Formal \IB - Instructions to Bidders Master.doc INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS i •`` rn �..�� SE gad - '0 0- i d Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J TO BIDDERS: Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. 2. ALL BLANKS TO BE COMPLETED. 3. ONLY BIDS ON THESE FORMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. FORM OF PROPOSAL IOWA CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT EVIDENCE STORAGE PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, prepared by , for the Base Bid Lump Sum of: BASE BID on FORM OF PROPOSAL P, FP- 1 Dollars ($ The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ i ) ten percent (10 %) of the Base Bid amount. d BID ALTERNATES: 1 Alternate No. 1: > ,v v� Add or Deduct the Sum of: ti Dollars ($ ) on FORM OF PROPOSAL P, FP- 1 i 0 IL I u l 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa The following names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract. This list will not be read at the Bid Opening. Carpentry: $ HVAC: $ Plumbing: $ Temp. Control: $ Electrical: $ Tile: $ FORM OF PROPOSAL Fn v FP- 2 e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before FORM OF PROPOSAL Iq Firm: Signature: Contact: FP- 3 Printed Name: = Title: c- ;ice Address: v Phone: Contact: FP- 3 a 40 ti Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa , as Principal, and , as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated for Project. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful perfor- mance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. -.J The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations ofrygtl Surely and., its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may..,. accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby wa�oticelof an" such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this days A.D., 20_ > Witness Witness 0, (Seal) Principal By (Title) (Seal) Surety By (Attorney -in -fact) Attach Power -of- Attorney MM 1h &A Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J MORUt[G1 E W1=1=10ri11M Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ( "City "), and ( "Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the day of , 20_, for the Project ( "Project "), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201 -1997, as amended; C. Plans; d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; =} e. Notice to Bidders; M f. Note to Bidders; F g. Performance and Payment Bond; �, ,., „o � ra h. Restriction on Non - Resident Bidding on Non - Federal -Aid Projects; v L Contract Compliance Program (Anti- Discrimination Requirements); j. Proposal and Bid Documents; and k. This Instrument. "" FORM OF AGREEMENT �: im AG- 1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. DATED this day of CitV By ATTEST: Mayor City Clerk , 20 ,...a 3 i I � Contractor w . 0, By r y� X -0 (Title) > NO ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office FORM OF AGREEMENT AG- 2 0" Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa POW PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Dollars ($ ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. 0" WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of , entered into a (date) written Agreement with Owner for Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be 0" completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by , which IMF Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed -upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. a NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Ctantractorhall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be n'U and" -�' otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owlil S ?!!- Eli, B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the A *nenJ,4he Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptl�premedQhe P111 default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determination by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the +x"10 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND PB- 1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and /or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. 1W1 IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontractors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS IN THE PRESENCE OF: Witness Witness PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND Jim lrr DAY OF 20 (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) (Phone) PB- 2 (Principal) w: (Title) FrI 9 (Surety) 0 > ry J (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) (Phone) PB- 2 iW Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430-J Contract Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Compliance Program CITY OF IOWA CITY .3 7-1 n C, > -J 5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION I - GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors,=veildor .- and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Progii rrj', re rting�' responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of req,i ments willfn be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 0 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (14ted on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved tTpdthe City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. ■11 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2 -3 -1. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE CC -1 itYr 0 01, j Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION II - ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as !? follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et seq.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal'tmploy4nt Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide r assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE CC -2 r7l lrir r 4r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Signature Print Name CONTRACT COMPLIANCE Phone Number Title Date CC -3 C^ `J CC -3 J Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION III - SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity emplo r". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. O*of -moth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your woroorce. 4nd recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only use job - related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective CONTRACT COMPLIANCE e CC-4 4" i rrr I I W fit PW 60 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non - biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and /or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE CC -5 c'. 71 r" rn .s. ;++'' N V CC -5 t y Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 'otO City of Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 — 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Fed8ral or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing busines w with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisibs k� 1 of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance undet-; r t contract with the City. a > co CONTRACT COMPLIANCE CC -6 w a Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J GENERAL CONDITIONS ICPD Evidence Storage Iowa City, Iowa FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 1997 Edition, is not bound within this project manual but is part of the contract documents, and shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. Refer to Document 00 SCA Supplementary Conditions, for amendments to these General Conditions. The General Conditions may also be supplemented elsewhere in the Contract Documents by provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, Sections in Division 1 of the Specifications. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -1 Cr' . " Eli GC -1 h Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1- GENERAL DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1.1 INTRODUCTION No A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", AIA Document A201 -1997. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. B. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as s#ike -out and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as "bold italic ". D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety. 1.2 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS .., ,3 A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 Contract Documents to read as follows::,'; ._ 1.1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement beti+re�n Caner _ and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement bety4ern Owner r- and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is lid* as RG in y the project manual. �? B. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Catract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide. C. Add the following paragraph 1.2.4: 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1- General Requirements, govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. f; SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SCA Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.3 ARTICLE 2 - OWNER Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C, A. Change paragraph 2.4.1 to read as follows: 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven -day period after FeGeiptef written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may written Aetise4e without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies have, In such case an appropFiate Change QFdeF 6hall be issued drag the Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architects additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. a! of the AFGhi If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.1 through 3.2.2 to read as follows: 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume appmp late responsibility for such performance and shall bear aR appFOPFiate amount of the att0butable costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. B. Change paragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors, materialmen and suppliers and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC -2 F .b Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Change paragraph 3.4.1 to read as follows: 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work to be performed after regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to perform work after regular hours, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 0160 00 - Post Bid Substitutions. 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor. .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes alj�yelated!osts under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives aJr4CUim.%, fQr additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently becomeappareb; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making�sdch change as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. ,... rr1 E. Change paragraphs 3.5.1 to read as follows: 0 'Z 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and *pmerAi furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise�quirec� permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects flat +r�herir� and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. ,. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS r 00800 SC -3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa F. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall serr+ply perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. G. Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. H. Change paragraph 3.11.1 to read as follows: 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition all approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. Change paragraph 3.13.1 to read as follows: 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are located will be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted. J. Change paragraph 3.17.1 to read as follows: 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Owner in writing. K. Change paragraph 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property including loss of use resulting there SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC-4 F u a Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa from, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, Fegafdle66 of Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. Nothing in the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnitication by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to Paragraph 3.18.1. 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. irr L. Change 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES paragraph 3.3.4 to read as follows: Contractor shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per W day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. CONTRACTOR shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and /or paging service of this individual. M. Change TAXES 3.6 paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. Q 1.5 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows , o•„�,,� 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as sdtrth the„ Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without wr cong6rit of the Owner, Ger�aetef and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably wit�e#d. ;o ;y Ev co B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein (1) during construction, and (2) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS jr On it 00800 SC -5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 4.2.3 The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect and the Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and sedify recommend to the Owner the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The s, faFth in an exhibit to be iRGGFporated in the GentFaGt DOGuments. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regarding decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations intefpFetaiions required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay The Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations desisiGRG of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawing. When making such interpretations and recommendations deeisoons, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations desisiens so rendered in good faith. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC -6 n 71! F4 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa F. Change paragraphs 4.3.1 through 4.3.5 to read as follows: 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the Parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other similar relief with respect to the administration terms of the Contract during +ai the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims e must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor unless submitted in a timely manner. 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. G. Delete paragraph 4.6 ARBITRATION in its entirety (paragraphs 4.6.1 thru 4.6.6). H. The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. _f .. 1.6 ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS _ i A. Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following:; 5.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid openin Mist those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes /intends t enter 46�o a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreemerw 1. if no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3.1 to read as follows: 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS j;1 1 q 00800 SC -7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors. All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. B. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wfer}gfU" caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: B. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Work and related parts of the Work. C. Add paragraph 7.2.4 as follows: 7.2.4 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC -8 d L Im .. Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub - subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub - subcontractor. .5 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 1.9 ARTICLE 8 -TIME A. Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, URUSual delay ir► del+vedes, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, OF* detWfflines Fnay justify delay-, then the Contract Time shall be extended by ChanOe Ord& for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect, may d 'iiermiot. —n Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Conti o,# Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. �ti - c� �w D. Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. C� ,7 1.10 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 7Z > N co A. Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such final waivers. 5 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS r, iN 00800 SC -9 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Change paragraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architects reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect C. Add paragraph 9.4.2.1 as follows: 9.4.2.1 The Architects determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. D. Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor on or about the 15th day of each month. To insure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. PaymeRt On the -----F and within the time PFOYided on the GGRtFaGt IDOGUFnents, and 6hall se notify the AFGhttAnt E. Change paragraph 9.10.3 to read as follows: 9 0.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion there of is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. The making of final payment shall GGnstitute-a-waiv&F Of Glaims by the QWReF as pFavided in SubpaFagFaph 4.3.6. F. Add paragraph 9.10.5 to read as follows: Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa, 2005, as amended SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC -10 fl e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1.11 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add paragraph 10.1.1.2.: . The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as necessary throughout the project This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to -know. W B. Add paragraph 10.2.4.1: . When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable w advance notice. W, C. Add paragraph 10.2.8: 90.2.8 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. 1.12 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Change paragraph 11.1.1.5 to read as follows: 7,31 .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to og structi6n of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to undergrdtf uthiNes a?" loss of use resulting therefrom; } B. Change paragraph 11.1.2 to read as follows: -; 'i 11. 1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for nat'ss tRn lirrQ of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whicheve gVerage is greater. Coverage whethe shall be written on an occurrence basistand 1. shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work untinate of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. C. Change paragraph 11.1.3 to read as follows: 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work, and to be in effect for the full contract period. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverage afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and afe SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS D 00800 SC -11 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Feasenably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in . D. Add the following paragraphs 11. 1.4 through 11.1.12: 11.1.4 Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his /her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the following type and minimum amounts: Type of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence 2.AQare4ate Bodily Injury & Property Damage* $1,000,000 52,0001000 Automobile Liability Combined Single Limit Bodily Injury & Property Damage $1,000,000 Excess Liability $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. *Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage when determined by City to be applicable. 11.1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. In addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 11.1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11. 1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self - insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self - insured retention. 11.1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. 11. 1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC -12 P 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 11.1.10 The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims -made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: + A. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. 11.1.11 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.12 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS A 00800 SC -13 B. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is io required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum *^ of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. D. "Tail" or "prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self - insured retention than the insurance which it replaces 11.1.10 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's ;Fysuraf4 if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that bolls to either .., award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek4l*Ifia ,*,,, performance or termination, as the case may be. ,..., -n io 11.1.11 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance Csoveme identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modif;or in,�te event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered bythe saW insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's iw operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract 11.1.11 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.12 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS A 00800 SC -13 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Delete paragraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.12; add paragraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.5 as follows: 11.4.1 OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall. 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Owner's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured, 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all -risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. include $ 500,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER, 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made. 8. Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences 11.4.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. 11.4.3 All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC -14 5 h j Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 11.4.5 If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. r. F. Change paragraph 11.5.1 to read as follows: .. 11.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. �r G. Delete paragraph 11.5.2 in its entirety. H. Add the following paragraphs 11.5.1.1 through 11.5.1.6: .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with low the American Institute of Architect's Document A -312 (1984 Edition), with coverage provided by a surety having a policy holder's rating of "A" and a minimum class of 15 to financing rating in the Best Insurance Guide, latest edition. ®" .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default N under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in oft the Owner /Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to 60 remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. .. .3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remaZn in fuft"Jorce im and effect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractiragreo &and �t '"' will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision dal' the �. 4M Contract Documents. "`" I = c, .4 The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) day4 a&r reftipt �., of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the de of or-O defaults promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner thenal s& of the bond, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety'"shall 00 indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and /or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and /or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of r work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its Principal's denial of default as justification for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS A 00800 SC -15 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa .5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. .6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. Add the following paragraph 11.5.3: 11.5.3 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. 1.13 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Change paragraph 13.3.1 to read as follows: 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delive-red- At OF sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. B. Change paragraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. C. Delete paragraphs 13.7.1 through 13.7.1.3: D. Add the following to Article 13: 13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as fol lows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SC -16 r n a Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa required by local or state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non - discrimination. .2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance 13.9.1 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIRENTS) as follows: 1. For all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. 1.14 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT , 6 A. Change paragraph 14.2.1.4 to read as follows: -ry .4 Otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract DdLentc -or , B. Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: -v 4 cr Foi .5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as requireb;by thgt Contract Documents. j; C. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows: > 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, co including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract END OF DOCUMENT 00800 iiIii SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800 SCA 7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa RESTRICTION ON NON - RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON - FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: TYPE OF WORK: DATE OF LETTING: A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a non - resident bidder from a state or foreign country which gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state or foreign country. That preference is equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the non - resident bidder is a resident. 'Resident bidder" is defined as a person authorized to transact business in this state and having a place of business within the state, and has conducted business for at least six months prior to the first advertisement for the public improvement. In the case of a corporation, the above requirements apply as well as the requirement that the corporation have at least fifty percent of its common stock owned by residents of this state. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the bidder and his /her contractors and subcontractors at the work site until the project is completed. S:1EngWRCHITECTURE FILEWrchdacture MasterspedficationsWormalUrontend for faunal archkecWre projects 02 29 08.doc Z, RESTRICTIONS R -1 hereby certify that the undersigned is a resident bidder as defined above and will remain such from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME: ,..- W... CORPORATE OFFICER: TITLE:* -'- j .: -a DATE: v co S:1EngWRCHITECTURE FILEWrchdacture MasterspedficationsWormalUrontend for faunal archkecWre projects 02 29 08.doc Z, RESTRICTIONS R -1 FM Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. , 6. Future work. u 3 7. Purchase contracts. ., 8. Owner - furnished products. .�.. 9. Contractor - furnished, Owner - installed products. , 10. Access to site. c,'� 11. Coordination with occupants. 12. Work restrictions. ,o 13. Specification and drawing conventions. > r"a co B. Related Section: 1. Division 1 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: The Iowa City Police Storage Project. 1. Project Location: Iowa City Water Treatment Plant 80 Stephen Atkins Drive Iowa City, IA SUMMARY 01100-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J B. Owner: City of Iowa City. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Owner's Representative During Bidding: Kumi Morris Architecture Services Coordinator Iowa City Public Works Dept. – Engineering Div. 410 Washington Street Iowa City, IA 52240 -1825 (319) 356 -5044 kumi- morris(aD-iowa -city. org 2. Owner's Representative During Construction: Shaun Bradbury Special Projects Administrator Iowa City Public Works Dept. – Engineering Div. 410 Washington Street Iowa City, IA 52240 -1825 (319) 356 -2099 shaun- bradburye-iowa- city.org C. Architect: Larry Niegowski, AIA Howard R. Green Company PO Box 9009 - F 8710 Earhart Lane SW Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 -8947 0 LV 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS X5' TIib „Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the f6fl ing: 1.=' The remodeling of unfinished space on the basement level of the Iowa City Water Treatment Plant to create an office and climate controlled storage for the Iowa City Police Department. B. Type of Contract 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. I] SUMMARY 01100-2 1 C Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Installation of storage shelving in Police Storage area. "" 2. Installation of security systems. 1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Installation of storage shelving in General Property Room 010 and in Extra Security Storage Room 011. 2. Installation of security systems. 1.7 ACCESS TO SITE C A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as �- indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requ ire! ts oglhis Section. _,; - nl ru B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not dis @& por ns of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. > r-J 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to: ao a. Contractor Parking and Staging Area indicated in the drawings. b. Access path from contractor parking and staging area to the loading dock entrance on the north side of the building. C. Access to stairs and to freight elevator at loading dock. d. Access path from stairs and freight elevator from loading dock to the project area on the lower level of the Water Treatment Plant. e. The basement level under the administrative offices for the Water Treatment Plant (The Project Site). f. Storage Closet 104 accessed through the west half of Meeting Room 103 on the First Floor of the Water Treatment Plant. g. The roof above Storage Closet 104 and Meeting Room 103. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. ,�. SUMMARY to 0 01100 -3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. C. All vehicles shall enter at the public drive and all drivers and passengers shall register at the Water Plant's front desk before gaining admission to the site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent spaces during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day -to -day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify the Owner not less than 48 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.9n W�QRK RESTRICTIONS Vic Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. !a'I7 Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. ,,o :.. . — ° 11i On -Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working - } bioO s of 7:00 a.m. to 3:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated. C.' Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner and Water Plant Superintendent not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner and Water Plant Superintendent not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. SUMMARY 4. 01100-4 1 C C"i Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Nonsmokin g Buildin g: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building or on the Project site is not permitted. PO G. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on the Project site. Require personnel to utilize identification tags at all times. P" H. Safety Training: All employees of contractors and subcontractors performing construction, renovation, demolition, installation, maintenance or repair operations in or on the City of Iowa City Water Treatment facility shall have attended and passed the A, Contractor Orientation Program (COP) prior to starting work. COP is a site - specific, computer -based training program presented and administered by Kirkwood Community College. The courses are available at Kirkwood Cedar Rapids and Iowa City campuses by appointment only made at least twenty -four hours in advance. Appointments may be made by calling (319) 398 -5899 ext. 5234. The cost of the program is $30.00 per iw person per class (there is a separate class for the Water and Wastewater safety training). Upon successful completion of the training, the contractor will receive a safety badge that will get them admission at the specific facility for which they have trained. Please note that the Contractor Orientation Program is only available in an English - language version. If the contractor or subcontractors have any non - English speaking 7 employees, the employer is responsible for providing translation of the training material for their employees. Please contact Kirkwood Community College in advance to_glake appropriate arrangements if this is necessary.. 1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS ., 0, A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for 'Ikn stft ofd t r language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases Qt n u�d in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: „J 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in- r.. Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. PW B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: SUMMARY 9 01100-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Completion Time: The Contract completion date for the total Project shall be as listed in the Advertisement for Bids. B. Permits, Fees and Notices: The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections for the proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which were legally required at the time bids were received. Contractor shall apply for a local building permit. The City will waive the permit fee. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100-6 m LA t� SUMMARY 01100-6 d Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to the Contractor's parking and staging area, the basement area under the administrative offices, Storage Closet 104 accessed from the west half of Meeting Room 103 on the First Floor, and the roof above Storage Closet 104 and Meeting Room 103. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergencVehicl4 at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. F ; 4= �' a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances' b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements --for storage Chi materials and equipment on- site. r I B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weatherttSt coition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by constructi& ope %ions. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. C. Provide portable toilets for use by construction workers at the site. Coordinate location of portable toilets with the Owner's representative. D. There shall be no smoking on the premises. C7 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 M '�ep i pG w4 LL V C7 J 0 rte+ WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140-2 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Section. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Contract, including General and Specification Sections, apply to this C� SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternate ; "-') 01- .:..�. j, DEFINITIONS : � > i'rJ Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. PROCEDURES Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. ALTERNATES 01230-1 rj Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1. 1. Base Bid: General Construction excluding Restroom 015. Base bid shall include installation of Door 015a, framing and finishing of the wall between Restroom 015 and Janitor 016, and the framing and finishing of the drinking fountain alcove in Corridor 013. 2. Alternate: Add Restroom 015 - a. Install plumbing for water closet, urinal, lavatory and drinking fountains; b. Frame plumbing chase between Restroom 015 and Storage 014; c. Frame ceiling for restroom 015; d. Installation of acoustical insulation in plumbing chase walls and above ceiling; e. Install fire sprinkler heads for Restroom 015; .- f. Install electrical wiring, light fixtures, detector for Restroom 015; g. Install blocking in walls for toilet accessories, including future toilet partitions w and lavatory counter; >j .o t- h. Install gypsum board on walls and ceiling; i. Install ceramic tile on floor; ILL =F -- j. Install vinyl base around room; 0k. Paint walls and ceiling with epoxy paint; . -1. Install lavatory counter top; m. Install water closet, urinal, lavatory and drinking fountains; n. Install toilet accessories including grab bars at water closet, mirror, soap dispenser and paper towel dispenser /waste receptacle. END OF SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES 1 01230-2 1 i Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedur6t for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. ' '0 j- 0 G 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK Off, -0 A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Mrk, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner- Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project I Iowa City, Iowa C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor - Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. w Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the 0 proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or — system specified. (, 7 Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. x".5 = ANISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS fe .. 0 A`. Allowance Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit Price Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. I CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2 1 r F F I im Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Work Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-3 END OF SECTION 01250 0 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-3 H Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections: `' 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements gavernirtr the`" handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administcative4 procedures for handling changes to the Contract. ray .,. 3. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements qq�rnirfT the use of unit prices. ° °> '' '0 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for adminis tttive requirements governing the preparation and submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. 5. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of submittal schedule. 6. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for administrative requirements governing submittal of cost breakdown information required for LEED documentation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0 01290-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. M 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. — 3. < Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate c ,t C� the following for each item listed: -- a. Related Specification Section or Division. UJI b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. F:� * d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. LJ = t e. Name of supplier. :.. 0 f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one - hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. r n PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2 1 L' 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part iY of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line -item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. �• a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next L Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 7 01 I A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous appI`kaiion- %_andr'T1 payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. - - �„�„ 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time o.' gubstghtial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requkemem B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the ?" Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered r Irw by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the r seventh of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Contractor may submit a draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. t PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner - requested project acceleration. F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment. rn b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. '— < C. Additional materials stored with this Application. (D d Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application. LLI G� T�Smittal: Submit one signed and notarized original of each Application for Payment pluwo copies of each signed and notarized Application for Payment to Architect by a L._ .� m_ ,od ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Include waivers of lien and similar attaments if required. `- 1. 2Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 El F Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). _ "= 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary K., ':.not `-,final)-11 incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance ofd schedule by each Contractor. �. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). - 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. �.•+ PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. L. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 rn LU - 1 r r (D fw r PAYMENT PROCEDURES LJ 01290-6 1 f' Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART1- GENERAL 1.1 I'1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 5. Project Web site. 6. Project meetings. °` B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Ce6` areas of""' responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. :e%> P .i C. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for a description of the division of work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field- engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 5. Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with Owner's commissioning authority. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction. +� PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-1 3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.4 COORDINATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and M repair. 3. ": Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. �epare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special •� p dedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, i anglist of attendees at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. C PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2 1 C� �7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.5 KEY PERSONNEL A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) 7,. A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional tnfqtma 3n q interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare ands66mit tin RFrf°" in the form specified. - 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities-.ntroftd bEJ Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to amid d4�ys in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. �0 B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Software- generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." .- a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract „ v:> Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of L;? receipt of the RFI response. ..L LU Lis UJ Eso (6 receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven U_ - �L, c4le �dar days if Contractor disagrees with response. F� ', R4 -Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log at regular construction progress meeting. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4 1 h Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within five working days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference !^" before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later Ito than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. *- 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Partied ants - the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to cone mb'tters relating to the Work. - ::= _n 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,., -. udinig the - following: j '. 01- a. Tentative construction schedule. ;; ri b. Phasing., µ? C. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. *° d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.'' 6 e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. I. Sustainable design requirements. M. Preparation of record documents. n. Use of the premises and existing building. o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. S. Procedures for moisture and mold control. t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. U. Construction waste management and recycling. V. Parking availability. W. Office, work, and storage areas. X. Equipment deliveries and priorities. y. First aid. Z. Security. aa. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. rn d. Related Change Orders. -- ° e. Purchases. - f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. LU h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. .,, j. Compatibility problems. ;r k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X. Protection of adjacent work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION L 01310 -6 1 11 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion aad for final inspection for acceptance. C. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentatiorrr - .u.- e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data ==; ' .' f. Requirements for demonstration and training. � c M g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. �'- h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at r 6ubstintial Completion and for final payment. y ra i. Submittal procedures. " j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. I. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. M. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. *- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-7 6V Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. `' < 13) Status of RFIs. ,.� 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. `,; s,,� 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. -- 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. LL 4 `:: Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party P resent and to parties requiring information. t = _ a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings may be conducted at the same time and place as progress meetings. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-8 1 F 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. rr b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. C. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. !^ 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. ,.. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. - 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. C" t 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 0 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. y rr PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -9 E P" Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Start -up construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. r? l 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Field condition reports. ' 6. Special reports. B. Related Sections: ' -o 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts " for preparing; a corq§ined r Contractor's Construction Schedule. '0 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-1 rrw PON i io Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. N B. Stmt -up construction schedule. �.� Approval of cost - loaded start-up construction schedule will not constitute - LU ` - approval of schedule of values for cost - loaded activities. 0. tractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire LL $;hedule for entire construction period. 1 _� Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and `s `' labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. E. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. F. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. G. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2 5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.5 COORDINATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencemeol'bf th@ -Wor to date of Substantial Completion. r 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of edu e thzit-J shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized bykiange'drder. C) B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. a. Roof top mechanical unit. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 15 days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3 r Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner- Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. N f. Sample testing. < g. Deliveries. c „ Z- h. Installation. Tests and inspections. T; j. Adjusting. �.0 k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major >, portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. 1. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4 tw Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered RFIs. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 START -UP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE C7 �x A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit start-up horizontal bar -chart -type construdtf on sebedu6n within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work. y .. c -�.. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately., ',J den fir fn workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline sign ifica rdonsl ctioU activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for. retnginder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. ,J 0 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. Start-up Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time - scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. �- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to correlate with Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with M; Contract milestone dates. 3J Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer- drawn, time- .._. �,_ , scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the ='- Contract Time. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; i -' locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost- and Resource - Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-6 11 d Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time - impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. -- C' 9. Average size of workforce. .J 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare taWat d reports showing the following: ` F_ Pri 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 0 °` 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. > 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. ° 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. • CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.4 REPORTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, — shofving materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a c sment of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment d 7-: ircated or stored away from Project site. U -: Ci Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field -� - Mitions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit U- = a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differin o4ditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. g 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. 71 LJ r B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs , at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-8 1 C' Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in 6 advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage .a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In -House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. �> 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings relatedd"to ItjecM progress, alleged delays, and time impact. cr B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, updatev schedyje to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedulere teach regularly scheduled progress meeting. �.7 '0 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revkgbns have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently witf?the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION to r 01320-9 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions ' of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and admi i fiptiv6� and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, �pl4t and' other submittals. - o„M' B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting ApplicationF)fpr Payment„, and the schedule of values. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" fdw subVing schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ,., A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architects responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architects responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals. C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard *� SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES M 01330-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device - independent and display resolution- independent fixed - layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. c�J a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4= =. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. ,0 b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal category: Action, informational. a d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled dates for installation. i. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2 1 r 5 OM im P o Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2008. C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement form acceptable to the Owner and Architect. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals arefeceive C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for r(j u mitfws, as, follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of wl brnittal. N(Z= extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failuFerto tRansm submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including- `rubrtals I 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. �. adaiona time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Archit &,c 'will"a?ivise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for &ordingon. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. D. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. E. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. F. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa G. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Indication of full or partial submittal. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Transmittal number. I. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. m. Remarks. n. Signature of transmitter. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent r4 of revision. -- 3. < Resubmit submittals until they are marked with "Reviewed" or "Reviewed As d5 — Noted" notation from Architect's action stamp. t I I. D, tobution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, �? s6hhliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary fgr'15�rformance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. �. J.r ; us Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with "Reviewed" or " Reviewed As Noted" notation from Architect's action stamp. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 1 F Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required i" Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2- PRODUCTS .. 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory- installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. *- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES W 01330-5 A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files smaller than 10Mb. .. Architect will provide access to an FTP site for submission of PDF electronic files 10 Mb and larger. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically- submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and �^- certifications where indicated. 4. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requiremersj spend in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for eadb "element d= construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because stMdar published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, adas l�oduc W Data. - 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products a d optioNs are applicable. V 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. �*- e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory- installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. *- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES W 01330-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data]. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full -size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 22 by 34 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. cv 1. <Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories (5 ,, together in one submittal package. 2.2 2Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the tia. Generic description of Sample. Cb. Product name and name of manufacturer. Sample source. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. �l. t.._5 3. - Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6 C a Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will retain one and return one submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. 0 6 E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specifie try Didion 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." g cam: F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Divi"- 1 $ectior� l 1 "Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in DiviMn 1 Section "Payment Procedures." `) H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Submit subcontract list in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." h SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES M 01330-7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on c`' evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agcy, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R';zc RCLerch Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization Ana .0 al;�C' table to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect, for Project. Include the following information: ' 1.:- ,_,Name of evaluation organization. $ _3 2. ` ' ate of evaluation. C'- 3. -- ime period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-8 E P" Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final PW location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. C L PART 3 - EXECUTION i..,... .wmr 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check fcoor it tion with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Document ote corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect . B. Project Closeout and Maintenance /Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES r 01330-9 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 C" EM LU M LIJ t4' j C J ...- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-10 G M Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibilitr for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 0 .� 1. Specific quality- assurance and - control requirements for individua nstrWtion_ activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. F"ejluirefiients in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. E �� oI� 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Conticfor's otherM quality - assurance and - control procedures that facilitate complia wig them Contract Document requirements. < ,,z 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality- assurance and -coi5trol seojces required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limitR by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality- Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality - Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full -size, physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and subassemblies. 3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. Source Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the sob�rce, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. ?'r, f i�etd Quality - Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for Lr iftistallation of the Work and for completed Work. ° eding Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. - Tgstang laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. t 0 1.0 Installer /Applicator /Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade - specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 Li H' ILI Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS r A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written rep6js sspedfied is other Sections. Include the following: C' 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4 � -a 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. > 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. ° 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0 01400-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory- Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory- authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory- authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. CN el 1.6 e5 QV ITY ASSURANCE 4 A. G`l r a1: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification I `G' levbls required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B Macturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems -- simiW to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service L ! performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 L11 L Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 ; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and jnspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, desigrk -end ext" .Ont to those indicated for this Project. 1. Factory- Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: Ar,w " "`uthorize° representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufactCCterC to iRspec installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design,,pnd exVnt tc� those indicated for this Project. `= > t,aJ C) 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality - control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality - control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality - control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality - control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality - control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality - control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality - control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, c­a examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of er Insller activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of "n reports. E E E� R:t Iting /Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Wo i Cctor's responsibility, provide quality - control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Docjments. F .c Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS u 01400-6 1 r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality - control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality - assurance and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspecto n, arMn similar quality - control services required by the Contract Documents. Cgordinate anc� submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Updatcias the,'Wor progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agert9w, ar tifeac party involved in performance of portions of the Work whe_0 test9 and inspections are required. > c� PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-7 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality - control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality - control services. END OF SECTION 01400 N LU LL - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-8 an Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa P" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved ": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties -3 and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. F) C. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "r6queVed,° "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same. - neanioj ash "directed." D. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in wojt l form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other tens inclgyiing "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicatR." E. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install ": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. REFERENCES �s, 01420-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract _._ Documents. AABG-':- Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737 -0202 — www.aabchq.com LU I *MA' American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367 -1155 �... www.abma- dc.org �Cl c� American Concrete Institute (248) 848 -3700 www.concrete.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548 -3118 www.agc.org AHRI Air - Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (703) 524 -8800 www.ahrinet.org REFERENCES 01420-2 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242 -3837 www.aia.org (202) 626 -7300 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394 -0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293 -8020 www.ansi.org ARI Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (Now AHRI) ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548 -2723 www.asce.org (703) 295 -6300 ;K ASCE /SEI American Society of Civil Engineers /Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) -, ... cry ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- (800 ?7- 4,;223 ' Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (40486 -8460 > �,�► ASME ASME International (800) 843 -2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882 -1170 www.asme.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832 -9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWS American Welding Society (800) 443 -9353 www.aws.org (305) 443 -9353 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297 -2122 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC www.fmglobal.com REFERENCES (800) 689 -2900 (703) 684 -0300 (703) 222 -2010 (781) 762 -4300 01420-3 REFERENCES 01420-4 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa FM Global FM Global (401) 275 -3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association (202) 289 -5440 www.gypsum.org GS Green Seal (202) 872 -6400 www.greenseal.org HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464 -8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419 -7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (Now IES) MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674 -8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298 -7578 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684 -0084 www.naima.org INCA < National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657 -3110 www.necanet.org U-1 tPA :'; NFPA (800) 344 -3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770 -3000 -'-' www.nfpa.org i.Pi.. SAE `; SAE International (877) 606 -7323 'J www.sae.org (724) 776 -4841 SEI /ASCE Structural Engineering Institute /American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817 -8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683 -2075 REFERENCES 01420-4 7 it Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803 -2980 National Association www.smacna.org it SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647 -7026 www.spri.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854 -3577 www.ul.com (847) 272 -8800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795 -1747 www.usgbc.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subjectlo change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contra ocunents. ICC nternational Code Council x I ($$$) 42'3 -723= iw www.iccsafe.org - 0. lY ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. ( 42658 www.icc - es.org ( 2) 699M543 D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (800) 321 -6742 (202) 693 -1999 E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800)872- 2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202)272- 0080 r* REFERENCES 01420-5 8 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access - board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866)512- 1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202)512- 1800 www .gpoaccess.gov /cfr /index.html UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800)872- 2253 Available from Access Board (202)272- 0080 www.access-board.gov PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 i.. J REFERENCES 01420-6 r_ f" Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary' for limitations on work restrictions,'; an utilityn interruptions. ,: -, _ : 1 j 2. Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Pro"j—kt sitEP- 3. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for con``tr`,tior;; an", maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roa6nd gave areas. y. w 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Owner will pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1 EJ pq Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 0 U .J LL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. G. Sewer, Water, and Electric Power Service: Use charges are specified in Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1.5 A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation - Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Moisture - Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage, including delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage, discarding water - damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work. 1. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire- resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction ef) �,, has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. D" [��C st Control and HVAC - Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that -o i6d[cates the dust - control and HVAC - control measures proposed for use, proposed l6c'6#ions, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if pfQ06sed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: ,. 1'. "' C Locations of dust - control partitions at each phase of the work. 2. " HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge. 4. Other dust - control measures. 5. Waste management plan. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 1 1i N Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having pe g g jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC /ANSI A117.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS C... 2.1 MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire - resistive sheet, 10 mils (0.25 a rrr� mi6hum ;,1 thickness, with flame- spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84. FT B. Dust Control Adhesive - Surface Walk -off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 J'_60 inches (914 by 1624 mm). C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, fro respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 1 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project -site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120 -V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4 -foot- (1.2 -m -) square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. ++ TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 it N Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 Ix) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid - propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline- burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures ". C- AiOiltration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter- equipped portable units with 92 =filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run =2 ly. Uua -10 ;.. -PART 3 - 1CUTION Ll- c:. , 0 3.1 r -:: INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 +fir OW Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service j can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. ,r% B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.- A • -�.; ", rte.' t..... E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking3 ter use-n of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities havia g,jurislictior - for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and faciNties. c"' F-il 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted,,' ermitted, t� low as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable tg5G Wner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing* ore initial use. > F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. G. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed in accordance with approved coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA- equipped air filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust - producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA- filter- equipped vacuum equipment. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5 6 e Li Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa H. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. I. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. J. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. L. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. -- :5 a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. .` c. Contractor's home office. l -- ` d. Architect's office. .._ e. Engineers , offices. f. Owner's office. a g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. '° 3. C', Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two -way radio for use f `~ when away from field office. 4. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6 1 pa Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary rads and5paved areas according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork." `' '' — 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contam9aa,ed eateria regrading, roofrollin compacting, and testing. -�-. 0, 9 9. P 9� 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot -mix asphalt p'avem(Tt un i immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot -mix asphse=ours pavement before installation of final course according to Div 2 $fiction "Asphalt Paving." > W C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire - fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. I", E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or �^+ adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste - collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. J. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to .... protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work - ; , so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be iss - refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or U.a provide new units as required. •o:: K_. doing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs -i;;;. .cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial `y Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. _ Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-8 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Security of building will remain under Owner's control. Contractor shall be responsible for securing areas within the building where Work is being executed and for the Contractor's field office. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. E. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. G. Walk -off Matts: Provide walk -off mats at each entrance to Project area from adjoining spaces occupied by Owner. : t C H. Protect air - handling equipment - ( w M� C', C�, I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire- prote( ti facilities types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controll I� fire*sseU Comply with NFPA 241. � , 1. Prohibit smoking on the premises. > 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating unifs", and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire- prevention and - protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire - protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture - Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS w 01500-9 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water - damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2.< Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. C) 3.° Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative L humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and 'n. .a�." ,o • :._. gypsum -based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. r b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record daily readings w "' over a forty -eight hour period. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. C. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-10 H-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 -hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project - identification -sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 e C- 0- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-11 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Sections: 3 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste�fesultipq froth partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. t i e "ram 'f cr r 1.3 DEFINITIONS c °r� A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and otlr soli r aste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Consgiction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off -site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT w 01524-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following: 1. Demolition Waste: a. Concrete. b. Concrete reinforcing steel. C. Roofing. d. Insulation. e. Gypsum board. f. Acoustical tile and panels. g. Carpet. h. Carpet pad. i. Valves. j. Sprinklers. k. Mechanical equipment. I. Electrical conduit. m. Copper wiring. n. Lighting fixtures. o. Lamps. p. Ballasts. q. Electrical devices. 2. Construction Waste: — < a. Lumber. �? 1 �; b Wood sheet materials. 0c. Metals. UI d. Roofing. -0 ' °' `:e. Insulation. J Carpet and pad. g. Gypsum board. Oh. Piping. i. Electrical conduit. j. Packaging: Regardless of salvage /recycle goal indicated in paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524-2 i 511 on T iii Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 2. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 3. Review waste management requirements for each trade. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION :5, 0- 3.1 IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportatiorf„ `and 'o�`�her items as required during the entire duration of the Contract. > `_... 1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 60 01524-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. E. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. F. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. H. -- Elec*al Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, dd-5 patr*, oards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. T3 :42 i..F..3 `© REC"I CLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL 0 A. _ Gei7e!�l: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on -site workers. d B. Z� RecycTing Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT E, 01524-4 1 r_1 irrr Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on -site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. B. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and leng. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardwaeb. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container an in a °r dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove an4oiposa'of fasteners. D. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallegand stare in a dry location. > w E. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals. F. Carpet: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. G. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. H. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store j in a dry location. "' CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on -site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut -Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on -site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. �..a END OF SECTION 01524 �0 y�Cik � f k {g��ISa . .., i�4 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT E 01524-6 1 C 4 low Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. _ a B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.,, - 2. Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substituttol'ts. Q„ i .. 3. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards .ciF products°T'1 specified. ...._ Z° y .. 1.3 DEFINITIONS > =� A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis =of- Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of- design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS a 01600-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis -of- Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A:- Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more 6 p9D cts for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously s� ted, even if previously selected products were also options. t 14.1 » Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods -% compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. a 2. '- `)If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but = "incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 r 0 on k Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project iw Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather - protection requirements for storage 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. -n 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage Pfi nat'e"nals �°-- and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location fnitki, Ow r. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project- specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS rr 01600-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 6. Product Selection Procedures: 1. < Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide c? °the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or `- substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. VJ LIJI 2._ ,, Manufacturer /Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or ` , source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies "with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's => �ry `' Mconvenience will not be considered. w 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 N. Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample ", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Arch4ect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product atches 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies, withsther ..� specified requirements, comply with requirements in Divisforo Sictio►... "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. .....'_ f,., Q- J A 1 D. Usual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase''as seftcted by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select at_ duc6that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, patter den* or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard nd prermum items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. ,.. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0 01600-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-6 1 C Lie 'r -0 w PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-6 1 C Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01635 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance;:,:,.' 2. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an altetj*p. 3. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements °wor =, sufitting� comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturer:,, "'~ 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and J�rpjtatims fob substitutions. :< 1.3 DEFINITIONS v W N) A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. �* SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES e 01635-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC -ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the C) < overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction 3 cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from 110 manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 'w= ' I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution 0 request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635-2 u Yw Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa r a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architects Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. *" b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. r, u PART 2 - PRODUCTS m....� ^t CTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately up§ discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparatiori`and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. C. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. *• SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES N 01635-3 1 � y ➢1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - ra(ECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01635 LU ,o... . 0 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635-4 1 0, e� Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Coordination of Owner - installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. c) j 7. Correction of the Work. rn B. Related Sections:a 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 2. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removafi of selewct. ed portions of the building. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner - accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching penetrations in fire -rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS I�r 01700-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. C. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire - suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Conveying systems. i. Electrical wiring systems. j. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements 0 or components in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity, that -" <11 results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in `< increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other n P Y• L,J a construction elements include but are not limited to the following: UJ; -0 0 a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. y, C. Exterior curtain -wall construction. c..� ..�:d. Equipment supports. ?e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. Jf. Noise- and vibration - control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2 , C 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on -site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. 1.5 WARRANTY ,,. A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS? A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and pcnstrumtion practices and procedures, utilize products for patching that .-ply �,yith l requirements of Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements." ell .o. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place malerials. or exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. l; EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS y 01700-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 1 Section 'Project Management and Coordination." ■ Dci:� Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for -- preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work. 0 .3 Ih$TALLATION 111 10 k.j A. Geii&al: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct L_ =D a to nent and elevation, as indicated. .. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. — Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 PM to Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 'm F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to POO be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. .... ... ., 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicoad, mdunt components at heights directed by Architect. W 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraCtioh =� 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, te#lates,� and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inse, anchor l bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in' &6hcre& or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 0 „o H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work ar"ot indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS rr 01700-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with requirements of Division 1 Section "Summary." E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: Where existing services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services /systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. F. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 60 §0i CC bing: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as LV igyi ible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements speified in other Sections, where applicable. 1 <: Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to r : C demonstrate physical integrity of installation. € 2. 2 Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-6 F1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and + appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 OWNER- INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction perOnnel. 4: B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Wo with worth performed by Owner's construction personnel. - cI r- 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred feonstructio -n schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction seta uleM- aser on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes toSledulo are required due to differences in actual construction progress. > ,,u 4 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. roll EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS i�w 01700-7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to cl— ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 1 C1,0" and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary ' thl u49h the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable L" components to ensure operability without damaging effects. LL. J. ' Lirtdting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the coh4) ction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements." EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-8 L-1 on Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK C) A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damag d_- �ubsrfates- and finishes. , C., j 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damage surfaces,[ -1 touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operatiT uipent. 0 B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified coalition. ui N C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 �.. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 5 01700-9 q Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 3. Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" for patch fir rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS rn A. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit stallatian or performance of other Work. > r� B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or load- deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire - suppression systems. PM CUTTING AND PATCHING im 01731-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain -wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration - control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review C) areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve -- potential conflicts before proceeding. Ell 1.5 VVXRRANTY A. 6 sung Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or LL =5 damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as notq void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-2 0 ON Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in -place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. ° 'p sw -n B. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patchin_' 'to" prevent'' damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portioT *, . bf P oject rn that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. . rn ? 6M'o C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or intern a ion oUree passage to adjoining areas. ry D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: Where existing services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services /systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to f- CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. c:) 3. < Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. - u d Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. U. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken =' surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-4 it iii iw iw 6W ?W it 6w Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430-J CUTTING AND PATCHING END OF SECTION 01731 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 01731-5 3 7- f 7 1 -q C) -< r- . 0- rn M 5;0 =c 0 *7z '0 > 01731-5 00, III Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 01 1.2 SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: P- 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. im 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the pre► i s, Owner -.„� occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section Special Procedures for Historic TreatmentR. � r I *toricr"— removal and dismantling. c r 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for cutting axm(� paRhin procedures. 07Z w 4. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal C9 above and below -grade improvements. N.) 5. Division 2 Section 'Tree Protection and Trimming" for temporary protection of existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION jiw 01732-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on -site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-2 C r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa j. E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician poll responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. G. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 3 A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastep 6;y a 'I ?ndfil �: facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. cr 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA- app�dved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. C" SELECTIVE DEMOLITION a 01732-3 I� Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there. F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted. G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire- protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. PAWT 2 - PRODUCTS - C. LV 2.1 ` P�FORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .04UIatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before l� ginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of autCtorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI /ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-4 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. W. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural PK deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. , 2. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recorpnendains for de- tensioning. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of prdd-d'struation °` r— photographs or preconstruction videotapes. °_; `.: rn 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed anti` salvawd. CJ Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misc@i rue�as damage caused by salvage operations. :2= 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that wiVJbe reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAUELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services /Systems to Remain: Maintain services /systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services /systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Existing Services /Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical /electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services /systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services /systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services /systems to other parts of building. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION i 01732-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire - suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material, b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris - removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, c_ waK,jkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. ' 1F: Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 ;, Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." L!�_j B �e1. 'mporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to � _ proyent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2.2 Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-6 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adPcent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. ` 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed sur' abps ta-9avoidTl marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable!"eterials. AL concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition Ad co gtent of hidden space before starting flame- cutting operations. Maintain ffy-4_,wata an portable fire - suppression devices during flame- cutting operations. 4 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. y 6. Remove decayed, vermin - infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off -site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Work in Historic Areas: Selective demolition may be performed only in areas of the Project that are not designated as historic. In historic spaces, areas, and rooms or on historic surfaces, the terms "demolish" or "remove" shall mean historic "removal' or "dismantling" as specified in Division 1 Section "Special Procedures for Historic Treatment." C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. " SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-7 F Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power- driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power -driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. CD M sonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to ZFE L ain, using power- driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. OD ` 6n- crete Slabs -on- Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up remove. E � f�Zoafing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by t -w new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA - approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-8 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 01732 ,`' 0- b T r1l zn Vim/ r, 40 .r W E SELECTIVE DEMOLITION tim M 01732-9 d Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 0 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contr 6i,, closeout,"n including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. M 0 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties.; 4. Final cleaning. > a, J B. Related Sections: w 1. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of o- unfulf&d requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after,i§5pection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional c--�iteno ( Wentified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will �.be iit�ed. ��1.�einspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous i iaspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final `agmpletion. ,E- -; 4..... �- 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2 h F.- 11 �1 1 a 1 u e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest - control final inspection report and warranty. ifrr 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. c ? 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, includit categories, for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systemst, .. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:.; a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch (215 -by- 280 -mm) paper. !! CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS -37, or if GS -37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PARf3 - EXCUTION -- Cr Q .1 .� FWAI CLEANING A. G6neral: Perform final cotYtj�y with local laws antip @lution regulations. cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste - removal operations to and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 Il F� G 0 n LF [I Li I k 0 C� L_7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. L Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be G�atisfarily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or.ie'Morafiion. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and iderltifidmion, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 2 I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment _ similar M equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar dro�pi.ngsMnd other foreign substances. IQ � M. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construclpn tha&ay impede operation or reduce longevity. w n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992 -01. Provide written report upon completion of cleaning. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-6 a` t -0 .._! `.. �• t ' ":. C) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-6 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 F-11 1.2 SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements foroject ' rbcord 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. _n 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. c~ 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked -up record prints with any supplemental drawings that may have been provided during construction posted within the drawing set. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-1 co of Multiple Contracts" for coordinating �ject record documents covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for final property survey. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked -up record prints with any supplemental drawings that may have been provided during construction posted within the drawing set. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J I Iowa City Police Storage Project I Iowa City, Iowa C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance , manuals, submit duplicate marked -up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record - keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. o- C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. ° d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. ' 0 e. Cross - reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic L±3 documentation. LLI 2, ;'. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the _J _ ,,following: fa. Dimensional changes to Drawings. , Yb. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. _:-c. Depths of foundations below first floor. ` d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive. , k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. M. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-2 7 ^ iiw FM Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red - colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products a" instalk.4tions that cannot be readily identified and recorded later., 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of produ�ti � magrials and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product optiori' ;selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and othr rRatiorri necessary to provide a record of selections made. rj Aw 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product DWAA' hakjbeen submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submt pDd as 8cord Product Data. w 5. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as a paper copy or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Specifications. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 6 0 01781-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and 0- Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. b Do,<not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record &) dta iments in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from to ioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's R t re er�ence during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-4 `I s Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS " A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and + Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. _ 2. Emergency manuals. 0 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. { 4. Product maintenance manuals. �w 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. ....... C�, M B. Related Sections: -- 0 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordin rig opqfation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts > w 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submi"Is for operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA irr 01782-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Cr- 2.1 OPE�ATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY ca A.: Orgarnzation: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: LU 1. ,-J ':List of documents. 1 2. •. _ �4ist of systems. U, 3. aN_ .gist of equipment. "Y 4. ` ' Fable of contents. B. `' "List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. ' E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-2 r, Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. c, Y ; - i71 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. i-tl 7. Name and contact information for Architect. ©;��) 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent. '° 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the 'Archite6 that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross - reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross - referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4 01782-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf or post -type binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1 1 -inch (215 -by- 280 -mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross - reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple - volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross - referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. e.Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose d5 diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4.C,- 2Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch (215 -by- 280 -mm) white bond paper. -,o 5.5 '_--Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with - ''text. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text i pages and use as foldouts. --b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-4 [3 G Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: C, 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. > -� 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits "' i 4. 5. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special i operating instructions and procedures.y a ;J 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS w A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 69 iiir 01782-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break -in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color- coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, C) repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. G' .4 n u PF. (}c'dree Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name "rtd arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, L UI ad'd'ress, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, aP4 cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. Pro -duct Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-6 C Imo► i Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS 3 A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not pak& a shstem-n include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation- ,,ri[aaintrnance�°- procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts listed �ourc information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond i0fot'tnati n, a described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of cort$nts. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. it *� OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-7 �w 6W Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross - referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that c.. provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. CD < ;R I rgency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating k3updures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for La t" of emergencies indicated. Pr6duct Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data Odic ting care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into f" the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-8 F_�A G C Yw Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0 01782-9 Fri r. 0 w 01782-9 k•- Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. „ .> 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, Ftd egment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. B. Related Sections: 4: j- 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for det�66strkibn qV training for products in those Sections. r+ C. Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction tide~ un? r the Demonstration and Training Allowance as specified in Division 1 Sectioi "Allowances." D. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. Refer to requirements in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer - produced demonstration and training. video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING it 01820-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance -based test. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording. 2. Transcript: Prepared on 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch (215 -by- 280 -mm) paper, punched and bound in heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. 3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE C_ k ' Fa�51itator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating m mtenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that 5 ibdicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a LU rp rd of successful learning performance. Bps Instructor Qualifications: A factory- authorized service representative, complying with reelbirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation anc6naintenance procedures and training. C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required. D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820-2 e L 4 ?W Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. :w PART 2 - PRODUCTS y_ 0, # 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes indilual truing modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as requir+a by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. C. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 0 01820-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa b. Operations manuals. C. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. C. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break -in procedures. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. M. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820-4 Ell, C b. Checking adjustments. Noise '- c. and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. Troubleshooting: Include the following: r '= a. Diagnostic instructions. . o - b. Test and inspection procedures. -: Maintenance: Include the following: " a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820-4 Ell, C 8 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa b. Repair instructions. C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. err e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in iilrr coordination with requirements in Division 1 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data." -- "'!. 0 B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. M "� 3.2 INSTRUCTION tM� A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program�4d trai ing modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contract& and (�ner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance -based test. E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. •• DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Video Recording Format: Provide high - quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format acceptable to Architect. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. D. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded or by dubbing audio narration off -site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. E. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment. F. Pre - Produced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. END OF SECTION 01820 cr C; U_ r C_: DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING L4H' 01820-6 1 i1rY r Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. , =. 3. Wood sleepers."' 4. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: Q 70 1. Division 6 finish carpentry Sections for nonstructural carpentry item9 e;. 'pos�yi' to view and not specified in another Section. > 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. rm MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY fir 0 06105-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules - writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 A. B. t i WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained formulations that do not require incising, contai n otherwise adversely affect finishes. or natural finish, use chemical colorants, bleed through, or Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. `4 lication: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact F ; with masonry or concrete. 3. ° > Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on- grade. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY E I r 0 L n 1�� 1� u t ILL� 1 J G 06105-2 ' C E 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 FIRE - RETARDANT - TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire- retardant - treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test - response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire - Retardant - Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements Qecified obove for fire- retardant - treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being, subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. lase for Xterio locations and where indicated. s °" 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of pe cent a j less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative ^f d hidit Us fj where exterior type is not indicated. 5 7Z � 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tesd ac4ding ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated acceding to ASTM D 6841. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Other Framing: Maximum moisture content 19% of the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Douglas fir - larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 4. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 5. Spruce - pine -fir; NLGA. 6. Douglas fir - south; WWPA. 7. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 8. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA. Construction or No. 2 grade and any 9. Spruce - pine -fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce - pine -fir; NLGA. 4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Northern species; NLGA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or hem -fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce - pine -fir (south) or spruce - pine -fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 5. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. c- 1b. Z blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade ber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate Aefects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. Foe blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut IY > lu tber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.6` PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire- retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch nominal thickness. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-4 L� I PM Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.7 FASTENERS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure - preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power- Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. `" 1 E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recotrnnenc ed b' screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. :2 -0 > G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF &PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, IPA fixtures, specialty items, and trim. P" MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-5 �wi -0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project :$e'curely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa , 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening ' edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. ' D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: t �. - -+ Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. Code for One- and Two - Family Dwellings. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood - framed walls and partitions at each floor if level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive blocks of same width as framing members and 2 -inch nominal thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation :$e'curely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that , interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. ' F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative - ' treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. t �. - -+ Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 93. :$e'curely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, :-spl nplying with the following: :E NES NER -272 for power -driven fasteners. ' Table 2304.9.1 "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. �`� t �. - -+ Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential U_ Code for One- and Two - Family Dwellings. if Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-6 F� "M `r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure - preservative- treated, key - beveled lumber not less than 1 -1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron - treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, I" "' miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. END OF SECTION 06105 -r X i -O "' MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-7 e� fir PM Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: �4> 1. Plastic - laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic - laminate countertops. 3. Closet and utility shelving. C_ y.. M 1.3 DEFINITIONS -- ni A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, ;;and haaging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction 1516-Tore woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large - scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets soap dispensers and other items installed in architectural woodwork. B. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom - fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1110 06402-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING L� Iowa City Police Storage Project 1 Iowa City, Iowa it A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in ' other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do enclosed, wet work is complete, temperature and relative humidit y construction period. not deliver or install woodwork until building is and HVAC system is operating and maintaining at occupancy levels during the remainder of the B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 C ORDINATION :Za IL W, 4., Q ordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural U WDodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PAfkt 2 - PAODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium - Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2- Exterior Glue. 4. Particleboard: Straw -based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2, except for density. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 ' C bw Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 6. Veneer -Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP -1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. C. High- Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high - pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. C. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Haclware (Scheduled by Describing Products). "a B. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.. C- C. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that {complies witwn 1; � product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. r�; i 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS > w A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in -place anchors. C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom -grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: P" INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. D. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 PLASTIC - LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. C. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High - pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: c.O .1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. c'= ' 3'. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. Edges: PVC tape, 0.018 -inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. E. - Goncealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High - pressure 2ecorative laminate, Grade BKL. `F'. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Patterns, matte finish. 2.6 PLASTIC - LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Custom. B. High- Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 Ilrn Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Patterns, matte finish. D. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Particleboard made with exterior glue. G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic - laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.7 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING F3 A. Grade: Custom. B. Shelf Material: 3/4 -inch thermoset decorative panel with PVC or ptyester� edge'" banding. C. Cleats: 3/4 -inch thermoset decorative panel. UJ PART 3 - EXECUTIONS 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop- fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 Ilrn Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid- surfacing - material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C` 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow, or other p variation from a straight line. `-. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. r 4;: ,)Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H.c Toua up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6 1 rom Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa LV C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop - applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-7 0 0, v+ INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-7 0 F Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 07841 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1 -) A. Section Includes:: 1. Penetrations in fire- resistance -rated walls. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. U B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests perform6d by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-1 i Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core - drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire - Resistance -Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 -inch wg. 1. Fire - resistance -rated walls include fire walls fire- barrier walls smoke - barrier walls CIO and fire partitions. c1 2. - Rating: Not less than the fire- resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. :5 Ex'p " d Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame - spread and smoke - UJI developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per p ° AS`' O-,E 84. L — D. = 'Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those - components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-2 1 ow rn Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, .sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetratiorF)firestop�ing. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete. -' 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufact . wr,#ten installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicted. 0- B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. —' C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire- resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-3 4PW 60 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY -' a A. Section Includes: - ` �-- 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. - , •, o� a B. Related Sections 7J - ;a 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow met f�ors�o 2. Division 9 Sections "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow meta oors % nd frames. °' 3. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI /SDI A250.8. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire- resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES y 08110-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. C. Fire - Rated, Borrowed -Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. co G° Sto& hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units mammum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 -inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. W. � I— ::_ Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air , µj circulation. L11.7 PF JECT CONDITIONS fi 0 A ` "' Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. , STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1 08110-2 1 L 4M Sir Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. :w 3. Kewanee Corporation (The). 51, 4. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 0 5. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll -Rand company. W, = °` i= rT1 2.2 MATERIALS 0 w A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel ( ), T4 B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591 /A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame - spread and smoke - development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0 08110 -3 L: Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa J. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral- board, or vertical steel - stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire- protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal- resistance value (R- value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) Locations: interior doors where indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single- Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Vertical Edges for Double- Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2 -1/8 -inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042 -inch- thick, end co closures or channels of same material as face sheets. CD 6 Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." ! @, It0dor Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold - rolled steel sheet. Provide doors .. + goriiplying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI /SDI A250.8 for level akd4nodel and ANSI /SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1 :- Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) or Model 2 (Seamless). C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI /SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold - rolled steel sheet unless metallic - coated sheet is indicated. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down or face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked -down, drywall slip -on frames for in -place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI /SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: °' rn 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap- and - stirrup or T- shaped anchors" (Vii uit same size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated sms no -`less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less thga 6.17Anch thick. '' 0- 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip -on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8- inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2 -inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. I" C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from 6 same material as frames in which they are installed. !" STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5 R Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.7 ACCESSORIES Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa 'J A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. I B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4- inch -thick by 1 -inch- wide steel. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. ' C. Hollow Metal Doors: ' 1. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire- performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. oo 2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams ' or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at ' 0 crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3i ,i r Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed LU -A fasteners unless otherwise indicated. ,.� 41 , Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. ' 5 - Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four t- . 'spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: , 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6 ' 7 e Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal -stud partitions. , C. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. v d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more ttfah? 6 i9;hes.. M from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 ijches-o.c..�.. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather - stripped doors, drill stops to xb6eive' door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. = 6 1 a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receiv6-Alree :door silencers. O � 19 b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two dc5 silengers. 0- E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI /SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface - mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI /SDI A250.6 and ANSI /DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0 08110 -7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI /SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field- applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. J n r B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built -in anchors to verify actual locations ' before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions co detrimental to performance of the Work. C� < Pr -' eed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2NO P.I PARATION 9`S Re*rtiove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by -1 g�c ing, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and inv®ible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface - mounted door hardware. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-8 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.3 INSTALLATION .- A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire- protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face , joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flus"Fand iq, sible on exposed faces. C. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on s8cUre sde of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. - Cr_ e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after �frames ave been properly set and secured. C f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as' - wall�are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tol(?rancesp- g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder- actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In -Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-9 d i7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project , Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. ' b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of ' jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non - Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ,A. Filial Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before , i6W inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and riiiiace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or `6tl erwise unacceptable. 7 ;:.. .. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after list llation. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying, rust - inhibitive primer. D. Metallic- Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-10 1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including the following: a. Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. b. Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. C. Point -to -point wiring. d. Risers. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-1 A. Section includes: Q 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:. a. Swinging doors. 2. Electrified door hardware. o, B. Related Sections: U `:z 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames ". ::�_,, '° 1.3 SUBMITTALS > w `' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including the following: a. Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. b. Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. C. Point -to -point wiring. d. Risers. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-1 0 i Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J r,• c� 1. 0 Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. C. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. d. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross - referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. 5) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. CO LITY ASSURANCE fnfaller Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and ap ,roved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is evadable during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and 6viner about door hardware and keying. 1. '._ Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. C. Smoke- and Draft - Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft - control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 s■ r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA- ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non - Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 3. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING` A. inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for doh "4har& tare delivered to Project site. r. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with ttinalloor hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and' neceV4ary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 1.6 COORDINATION �., A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor- recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing -In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.7 WARRANTY Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware ' Scdule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section. C, l I- .Vignations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other LW gi�Dhctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door F , Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1Z: v;. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are ? listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template - produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow -metal doors and hollow -metal frames. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I Will I DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 1 L1, Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Hager Companies. C. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.3 SELF - CLOSING HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Self - Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA Al 56.17. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Hager Companies. C. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES > -- A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. ='; € cr ,�. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts requ for�bele fire doors, and as follows: �*? 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) latch bolt throw. > v C. Lock Backset: 2 -3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. +R* D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Wrought Forged or Cast. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought Forged or Cast. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 4. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses). E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll -Rand company. 2.5 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1. "' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Detex Corporation. C. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll -Rand company. B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMAA156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset. C. High- Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30; Grade 1; Type M, mechanical; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset. 2.7 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. Master Key System for rooms used by Police Department: keys and a master �4 key operate cylinders 010a, 010b, 011 a, 012a. >: Existing System for rooms use by Water Department: Use existing system for doors 014a, 014b, 016a, 017a, 017b a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. Br_ ­ 4-y,4. Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. 2.8 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; US 26D. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hiawatha, Inc. b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company. C. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 2.9 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active -leaf, hold -open lever and inactive- '" leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon- coated strike plates; with built -in, adjustable safety release; and with internal override. B. Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with i &ke pk a for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self - latching bolts art~ Q�ed .�— C. Astragals: BHMA A156.22.' -�- M 2.10 CONCEALED CLOSERS T -n A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack - and - pinion hydraulic type V40 adj4�)able sweep and latch speeds controlled by key- operated valves. Comply -+with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll -Rand company. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.11 CLOSER HOLDER RELEASE DEVICES A. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA Al 56.15; Grade 1; closer connected with separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke - detecting devices. Door shall become self - closing on interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system loss of power. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll -Rand company. C. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.12 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor- Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or i' aluminum base metal. im DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7 a, 6 Iq Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. Hiawatha, Inc. C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.13 ELECTROMAGNETIC STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA Al 56.15, Grade 1; wall- mounted electromagnetic single, floor - mounted electromagnet single and floor- mounted electromagnet double unit with strike plate attached to swinging door; coordinated with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for labeled fire -rated door assemblies. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.14 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Un a. Hager Companies. b. National Guard Products. -� C. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. LU d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. e. Zero International. ..a � 2.15 =' MF AL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS AT ; Meti Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050 -inch- (1.3 -mm -) thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hiawatha, Inc. b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company. C. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8 1 6 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.16 FABRICATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA Al 56.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do nqt use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite fq5e is eosed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardyGaw. .-Wher through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, pga)ke 4eve for each through bolt. 2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow -metal doors. ! C2 C, 3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in 'DIM WENS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 0 4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterio5applig4ons and elsewhere as indicated. -4 2.17 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. DOOR HARDWARE iim 08710-9 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION �J Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI /SDI A250.6. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI /SDI A250.8. B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 c Wions. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on s,ti trates involved. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce UL .o c,.; attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. - ' 2 r Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. Cl Hines: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not r 9e YP q fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-10 h ro Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door h wareG and state in each report whether installed work complies with or de„vib�es jtv-m „ requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. w cm. 0- �- 3.5 ADJUSTING o;r� �. -;o A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and e4h door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. I"^ DOOR HARDWARE E 08710-11 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS Door Hardware Set No. 5: Single Interior Office Function 1 '/2 pair hinges 1 mortise lockset with lever handle office function 1 wall bumper Door Hardware Set No. 6: Single Interior No Lock 1 '/2 pair hinges 1 push plate 1 pull with plate 1 wall bumper 1 kickplate 1 closer Door Hardware Set No. 10: Single Restroom Privacy 1 '/2 pair hinges 1 mortise lockset privacy function 1 closer 1 wall bumper 1 kickplate Door Hardware Set No. 13: Single Interior Storage Function 1 '/2 pair hinges 1 mortise lockset with lever handle storage function 1 closer 1 wall bumper 1 kickplate Cleor 1=i ware Set No. 16: Pair Interior Mechanical /Storage �Wir hinges .0 1 =set manual bolts on inactive leaf F'tnortise lockset classroom function U f. -W411 bumper s 1 overhead stop Y -' 2 kickplates Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa Door Hardware Set No. 17: Pair Interior Removable Mullion 3 pair hinges 2 rim panic, no dogging exterior cylinder with lever handle storage function 1 removable mullion 2 closers with hold open 2 kickplates 2 wall bumpers DOOR HARDWARE L P-1, F, 17 u i 08710-12 1 L F] , x+ it rr d Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa Door Hardware Set No. 19: Pair Interior Mechanical /Storage 3 pair hinges 1 set manual bolts on inactive leaf 1 mortise lockset classroom function 2 wall bumper 2 kickplates Door Hardware Set No. 21: Single Interior Storage Function 1 Y2 pair hinges 1 mortise lockset with lever handle storage function 1 closer 1 overhead stop END OF SECTION 08710 v DOOR HARDWARE 08710-13 F 0 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites. 1.3 DEFINITIONS w o~ A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass;*,, botl!.as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters aecordin%to ASTM C 1036. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. GLAZING 08800-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." E. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of , glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. ' Bn Co ly with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and CD se xig units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. ") t i,., � 1.8 !�j PAO-JECT CONDITIONS ,,,,r, A. "I Envi'pnmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate , temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers `' and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other caus`lis. ` 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL t A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. , GLAZING 08800-2 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa e-� 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat - treated float glass. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality -Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.,> B. Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality -Q3; Class 111 ar) unles" otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. �'"'°' 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS _. { C, A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one anotheo and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral- curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl- based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. r B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: GLAZING 08800-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. AAMA 810. 1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply u� with system performance requirements. < PAST 3 .€ECUTION L' It 3.1 l3(A-MINATION A" Ex2 nine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance wf#h °,the following: Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass- framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. GLAZING 08800-4 bw Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PW B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use PM materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. L 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances,�,nd ade"uate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Renidv6 damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged -O[ s is glas with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weake'rnglaqwan impair performance and appearance. - D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, a deterAwed by preconstruction testing. PW E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. GLAZING PM 08800-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.4 A. TAPE GLAZING Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.L SEALANT GLAZING (WET) cA. it stall continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, - ` §elween glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent k sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants Lr cLwe. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth .... _ of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. U— . B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or 6-ond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. GLAZING (j, 1 L� 08800-6 1 L' 6 r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry L surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 6 C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days �.. before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. to Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. .� END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING N Ion (_ i 7 > t �J co 4W rm j Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 09111 NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: _ 1. Non -load- bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board3assem es. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid �*em PART 2 - PRODUCTS (-3 cr 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS --' c: A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: For fire - resistance -rated 4 mblie�o that incorporate non -load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction ifntical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: i 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold- rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or 1 -1/2 inches. E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross - furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. C. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to o < substrates. B. IsaC on Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1 .1-1,J,,-Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), > nonperforated. _ ° 9 2.: - Foam Gasket: Adhesive - backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener P,fl a - ;penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud .. ..:, size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow - metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING F1 09111-2 1 I I om r Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.2 PREPARATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equi ent 96vices, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construc3m, C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. :.; °, C- D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non - load - bearing `feel fr -hmin members. Frame both sides of joints independently. ::_� 7, -:q W 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES co A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING 4 09111-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire - Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire- resistance- rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire - resistance -rated assembly indicated. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Sgnd hangers from building structure as follows: ` 1. w_1 -Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within .:ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. ._a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting a�s! - p` horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. r• . -° 2. here width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in -place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111-4 r. n a- din t t pop im I" ' Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09111 NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111-5 r -•J _;;rte 2J- 7z yti CSR+% OD 09111-5 PM 60 ON INN Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Non- Load - Bearing Steel Framing" for non - structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. _ 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS' c �-- �, A. Product Data: For each type of product. o, t 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING rn � •c3 A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected .4st weer, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential caust§ of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. GYPSUM BOARD lrr W 09250-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire- resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Georgia - Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2. Lafarge North America Inc. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. f3� Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 6 1_ =' Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4 -- Long Edges: Tapered. _—.4 D:-Q 6yp6um Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1'' - ;Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2 -Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 r' TRIff ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum- coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U -Bead: J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. L GYPSUM BOARD 09250-2 1 11, w. am im Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.5 A. B. C. E7 2.6 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. C. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 -T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion - resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -10 glass mesh. f ; a 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 7 Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation thm is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Leve15 finish, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing manufacturer. AUXILIARY MATERIALS Panel: As recommended by backing panel A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). GYPSUM BOARD 09250-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. Q. In all panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and s with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into C2 LU R D? (o4pate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where ittqunediate supports or gypsum board back - blocking is provided behind end joints. [�oM�not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on r oposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of E :a framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc., except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. ' GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4 7 "M am Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor /roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. ,.a 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD '} A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated., 2. Type X: Where required for fire- resistance -rated assembly.,, 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. n I =' B. Single -Layer Application: ±•� 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall /partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls /partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face -layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly. 2. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance- rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z- furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. GYPSUM BOARD �r E 09250-5 6 � in 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4- inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. F11 C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L -Bead: Use where indicated. zB. Alyminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.' ISHING GYPSUM BOARD i toneral: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, ,o 04iSetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare ' r� Oyj5�um board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from ac�ccent surfaces. F� Prdll open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-6 1 f 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. E. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and .- other non - drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. it 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 �^ GYPSUM BOARD w 09250-7 T > 1.+) 09250-7 F F Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for glass -mat, water - resistant backer b04rd. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 5 A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation stands a6d ini ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. -< „* M B. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. > C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 'c° 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial SelectionNerification: 1. Full -size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Full -size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. CERAMIC TILE 09310-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Crack isolation membrane. 2. Metal edge strips. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 0 ,` Std liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. c U r r t-(-andle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent 1.!:., '0 cF07ed surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonqJng surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. - 18 =r Pk fl ECT CONDITIONS 0 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish full box and any partial box of full -size units for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. CERAMIC TILE 09310-2 1 r .,. fir Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a•- 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI Al 08.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For the exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend the in fqptory and package so the units taken from one package show same range in colors as#hose taken from other packages and match approved Samples. " mm . `.F- 7n D. Mounting: For factory- mounted tile, provide back- or edge- mounted tilesemblles aq- standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. F M 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use orgidge mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writin t thibtype of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of ucces4t pi in- service performance. co �. E. Factory- Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Olean; Division of Dal -Tile International Inc. b. Crossville, Inc. C. Daltile; Division of Dal -Tile International Inc. 2. Composition: Porcelain based, impervious unglazed ceramic, through body color. 3. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches for floor tile. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 6. Finish: Unglazed. CERAMIC TILE 19 09310-3 L, Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 7. Tile Color and Pattern: American Olean A94 "Willow Speckled" or as selected from alternate manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch across nominal 4 -inch dimension. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. C. Laticrete International, Inc. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc. e. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1. B. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by C) 5 one of the following: c a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. = °- -- b. Bostik, Inc. C. Laticrete International, Inc. '= d. Summitville Tiles, Inc. e. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. U_ = 2 r Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate .. c) or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene - butadiene- rubber liquid -latex additive at Project site. 4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. C. Water - Cleanable, Tile- Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. C. Laticrete International, Inc. CERAMIC TILE 09310-4 ter Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.4 2.5 A. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa d. Summitville Tiles, Inc. e. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. GROUT MATERIALS Polymer - Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. C. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. f. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene- butadiene addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." r 1. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in the adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. C. One -Part, Mildew- Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic the joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in- service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. C. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. CERAMIC TILE f, 0 09310-5 { 0, rubber in liquid -Ctc fore for ;1 -' a CIO A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." r 1. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in the adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. C. One -Part, Mildew- Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic the joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in- service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. C. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. CERAMIC TILE f, 0 09310-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile- setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L- shape, height to match the and setting -bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; nickel silver or stainless - steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed - edge material. C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT AF Mid mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout ED rpatifacturers written instructions. I] B� Attdinaterials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C, .; Obt+n and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing tiFu6j' and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with o ti p m performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile- setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. v CERAMIC TILE 09310-6 1 r N Howard R. Green Company P Y Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION jW A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin -set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound R•• specifically recommended by tile- setting material manufacturer. L B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended „ and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. C. Field - Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile typ"r nee 4d to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precga;ther with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat t;ln"po�io tile`gl surfaces. f;, 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION `- M A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” for TC*�`fnstaifition methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of ttit ANSI:; 108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of the installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. C. Tile floors composed of rib - backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of the without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. lr" CERAMIC TILE L it 09310-7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out the work and center the fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within the sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. H. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout - sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 e-) CL _.. NING AND PROTECTING c ! � A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so L LU � they''-pre free of foreign matter. ";Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. .. 2.77 " Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's Cwritten instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by the and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. CERAMIC TILE 09310-8 1 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. L D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE ., A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F113: Thin -set mortar; TCA F113. a. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer - modified unsanded grout. 6 END OF SECTION 09310 7 CERAMIC TILE 09310-9 6 rn @-, / ♦ -'0 > 7 CERAMIC TILE 09310-9 6 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS w 0 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling- mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot. C. Samples for Initial SelectionNerification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 -inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 -inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Research /Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7:. PROJECT CONDITIONS C) < Afn En� "ronmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are ased and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above cail�gs is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained a�tk►e levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours ,.�.. W_ _ before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 1.8 r COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS , A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing I contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full -size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. I ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-2 1 d Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Frost ClimaPlus Shadow Line Bevel by USG Interiors, Inc B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular 4, cast or molded. C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.85. C) E. NRC: Not less than 0.60. F. Edge /Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members. R M _ ril G. Thickness: 3/4 inch. a H. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory- applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. !" ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS LL1~F7�fi3c Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Corrosion Protection: Stainless -steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel- copper -alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc - Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless -Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel- Copper -Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel- copper -alloy UNS No. N04400. 4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung ") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch- diameter wire. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. USG Interiors, Inc.;. B. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold - rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot - dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16 -inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy -duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold - rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1f� E*MINATION amine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which 40 stical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with req *rements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions a1•fp ing performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. OProceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-4 1 5 I^ L Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.2 PREPARATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less- than - half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Fire -Rated Assembly: Install fire -rated ceiling systems according to-) tested", ire - rated design. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows ,.:.} 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other obects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling -supen system. 0 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire - resisnce -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by braci►"g, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power- actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in -place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, rn and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for C craning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling �cponents that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate ,, ._ M e0dence of damage. 1 ° 1 `0 END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-6 1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PW SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES ll� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-1 IN Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base., => 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 4 :. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection/Verification: For each type of product indicatQ i NO W 40 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W /sq. cm. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. B. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-1 IN Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Basis of Design: Roppe Corporation, USA #91 Camel color. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis of design or comparable product by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. C. Flexco, Inc. d. Johnsonite. e. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed when at least one leg is less than 12 ", when both legs are longer than 12" job formed is acceptable.. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. ry4-I. Finish: Matte. `',Qglors and Patterns: Roppe Corporation, USA #91 Camel color. 2.2SILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY Resilient Molding Accessory: .. Basis of Design: Roppe Corporation, USA #91 Camel color. Subject to L? compliance with requirements, provide basis of design or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. C. Johnsonite. d. Roppe Corporation, USA. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-2 1 e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Description: Transition strips. C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. D. Colors and Patterns: Roppe Corporation, USA #91 Camel color. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-3 r A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement r" based or blended hydraulic- cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. t PART 3 - EXECUTION '7_ """9 3.1 ,. EXAMINATION "' A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requir merS fo maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance ofq.h�Wor6 �w JrequirerRents B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-3 r G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Formed Corners: Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa ,3Jtb- Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where ' they are to be installed. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be 'BESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately C�nply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, that would otherwise be exposed. and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. CLEANING AND PROTECTION C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in products. continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of N resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. M I. Formed Corners: c ,3Jtb- Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. .�, Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. LL � . 3.4 ='. 'BESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION -- C�nply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. C B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient ' products. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-4 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. E. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-5 3 • � acswn� c .`' rr 09653-5 01 4 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: -- 1. Tufted carpet. . B. Related Requirements: f w„ 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilii, at wa#1 bas and accessories installed with carpet. =`.x,� 1.3 SUBMITTALS z �O > w A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for eac�°i type of substrate: 1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12 -inch- square Sample. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain - removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. CARPET 09680-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.5 WARRANTY Iowa City Police Storage Project , Iowa City, Iowa A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TUFTED CARPET A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. R & D II Brushwork by Mannington Commercial. B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Pile Characteristic: Multilevel -loop pile. D. Pile Thickness: .155 inches for finished carpet per ASTM D 6859. E. Yarn Weight: 26 oz F. Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. rn 4y ; �ondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. -, f Width: 12 feet. I �c 2.2 kNSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.' Adhesives: Water- resistant, mildew- resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and €.._` suQoor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. B. Seam Adhesive: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. r CARPET 09680-2 1 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3aection1'Cast- in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. k p n s = _T1 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and forei depoti& --- C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. j n 3.2 PREPARATION `'� A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparatiort"o and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue - Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. CARPET q 09680-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built -in 1 furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open- bottomed obstructions, ' removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face - beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet m adhesive manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 L; w:5 V7 1 CARPET 09680-4 FJ w P" Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 painting Sections for special -use coatings. - `r M 1.3 SUBMITTALS .� A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. `0 B. Samples for Initial Selection/Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well - ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING q 09912-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Diamond Vogel Paints. 3. Dunn - Edwards Corporation. 4. Sherwin- Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. m 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. _2 - _ brs: As selected b Architect from manufacturer's full range. W ;..^ Y 9 _12.3 PRIMERS /SEALERS LL Pc== 10'Jerjor Latex Primer /Sealer: MPI #50. ' b 2.4 c`� METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. B. Quick -Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 2.5 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 2.6 DRY FOG /FALL COATINGS A. Latex Dry Fog /Fall: MPI #118. INTERIOR PAINTING r 09912-2 1 r� Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.7 FLOOR COATINGS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Interior /Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI #60 (maximum Gloss Level 3). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with j requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: , 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. N : c') r ^_ C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and coma ibilit r� wit4:- existing finishes and primers. rr2 D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cte!� and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface - applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and repdme substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. Wk D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. INTERIOR PAINTING q 09912-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. F. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished m surfaces. c < Cam;, Rs tect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to WO& of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by s, = Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. O y E D.1 At-co'mpletion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged ot�Maced painted surfaces. 3.5 .'. INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 E. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss). 2. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 3.1A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer /sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss). INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-4 1 ��J 9 e� r Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J M, Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Enamel System: MPI INT 3.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior /exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Interior /exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). C. Topcoat: Interior /exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). C. Steel Substrates: 1. Quick -Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A. a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Quick -drying enamel matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Quick -drying enamel (semigloss). 2. Water -Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.1 C. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive or Quick -drying alkyd metal primer. b. Topcoat: Latex dry fog /fall or Waterborne dry fall. D. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. -. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer /sealer.`' ., b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss). END OF SECTION 09912 C ; "`� �` "- 0, rn `9 > - C) INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-5 4 e�» rr Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 09960 HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high - performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces. b. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: C) 1. Division 9 painting Sections for special -use coatings and general f'►eltd painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 01 t A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. -:4' 0"' B. Samples for Initial Selection/Verification: For each type of coating sys*�n and *?n each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. co 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well - ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATINGS 0 09960-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS Iowa City Police Storage Project 1 Iowa City, Iowa A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 INTERIOR PRIMERS /SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer /Sealer: MPI #50. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Regal, First Coat Latex Primer /Undercoater, 216 or M Moorcraft, Latex Undercoater & Primer Sealer, 253 -00. b. Dunn- Edwards Corporation; Eff -Stop, Acrylic Masonry Primer /Sealer, �I T W 709. - . c. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Speedhide, Int. Latex Primer Sealer, 6 -2. d. Sherwin- Williams Company (The); Pre 1328W200 P Y( Rite, 200 Latex Primer, ) P or Quali -Kote, Interior Latex Primer, B28WQ8001. ' -'2.3 EPDXY COATINGS c� Epoxy, Cold- Cured, Gloss: MPI #77. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Polyamide Epoxy Coating, M36/M37. b. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon, Epoxy Cold Cured Gloss, 95 -1. B. Water -Based Epoxy Floor Paint: MPI #93. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Industrial, Acrylic Epoxy Gloss Coating, M4303. b. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon, Water Base Epoxy, 98- 1 Series. HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960-2 1 L 0• L7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: IWO a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION -- 0 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendagp irk" MPf I Architectural Painting Specification Manual' applicable to substrates indiggtecf. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place Nit; are not tdn be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or v6+,g` ht oltem provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and coating ,,N 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were remove use workers skilled in the trades involved. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high - performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. I'" HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATINGS stir C 09960-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent ' finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces: r) 1. Epoxy Coating System: C, a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. C. Topcoat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. B0 Po Crete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces. 1.,.. ; Epoxy Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Epoxy Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer /sealer, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. C. Topcoat: Epoxy, cold- cured, gloss, MPI #77. END OF SECTION 09960 HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960-4 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Panel signs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transport��ipn Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility GLWelir s forte Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guideh6es." inc*� 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. .� B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C. Samples for Initial SelectionNerification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC /ANSI A117.1. SIGNAGE Iw 0 10431-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A -1 (cell -cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide signs that match existing room identification signs in the building or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Advance Corporation; Braille -Tac Division. 2. ASI- Modulex, Inc. 3. Best Sign Systems Inc. 4. Gemini Incorporated. 5. Grimco, Inc. 6. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 7. InPro Corporation 8. Signature Signs, Incorporated. B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. Acrylic Sheet: 1/8 inch (1.52 mm) thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Mounting: Unframed. a. Wall mounted with two -face tape. 4. < Color: match existing 5�: Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) n- surface with contrasting colors. EDT LU G i Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and ..� , symbols complying with ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC /ANSI A117.1. 64"shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters Wrtljsquare-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rournded shape. 1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised -Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). D. Panel Sign Schedule: 1. Sign Type: Room Identification Sign a. Sign Size: .2 "x8" b. Message Panel Material: Acrylic. C. Message Panel Finish /Color: Match existing d. Background Finish /Color: Match existing SIGNAGE 10431-2 1 J P_ i od PM im Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.3 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Text/Message Location / Door Police Evidence 012a Storage 014a Storage 014b Janitor 016a Storage 017a Storage 017b 2. Sign Type ADA Pictograph: a. Sign Size: 8 "x8 ". b. Message Panel Material: Acrylic. C. Message Panel Finish /Color: Match existing d. Background Finish /Color: Match existing Pictograph / Manufactures Standard Location / Door ADA Restroom ID — Unisex, Handicap Accessible 015a ADA Stair ID 301 ADA Stair ID 300 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. SIGNAGE 0 10431-3 —n =n 0__ A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. SIGNAGE 0 10431-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Verify that items are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall- Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two -Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl- covered or rough surfaces. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10431 rn U SIGNAGE 10431-4 1 Ir Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 7 4 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. Y == b. Fire hose valves. a C. Fire hoses and racks. B. Related Sections: �y 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers." �= _ 2. Division 13 Section "Fire- Suppression Piping" for hose systems, racks and valves. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 0 10522-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS C? 2.2 Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher or hose, rack, and valve. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Stainless -steel sheet. 1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. D. Recessed Cabinet: for hose, rack, and valve Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One -piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). E. Semirecessed Cabinet: for fire extinguisher Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one -piece combination trim and cW permeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for tecessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet inst6lation. .. �� Square -Edge Trim: 1 -1/4- to 1 -1/2 -inch backbend depth. �.. F.' 4abnet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet. 0 Door material: Aluminum sheet. H. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. I. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door - operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. K. Accessories: FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS FA C' L 10522-2 1 r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked - enamel finish. 2. Break -Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated. �r a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. „ 2) Application Process: Decals or Pressure - sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical L. Finishes: _ �,. 1. Manufacturer's standard baked - enamel paint for the following:, a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaced 4 dicated t receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2.3 FABRICATION C7 A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, Le door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory- drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS y 10522-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.5 STAINLESS -STEEL FINISHES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. C. Bright, Cold- Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for hose valves racks and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION h4, Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required byEtype and size of cabinet and trim style. i 3.3,-. iWM§TALLATION U N bneral: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights 'Gindicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: }_ Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. Firm Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. 4. Fire- Rated, Hose and Valve Cabinets: a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16 -inch tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout. G P-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-4 1 �J 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10522 C�, o a CD FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-5 N PWM rw Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public -use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for ceramic toilet and bath accessor eS. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following_'''? 1. Construction details and dimensions. O' -_0 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirementsor cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES IN 10801 -1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031 -inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper- and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. C. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. D. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Description: Single -roll dispenser. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. 4. Capacity: Designed for 4 -1/2- or 5 -inch- diameter tissue rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Cl Co ibination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Description: Combination unit for dispensing C -fold or multifold towels, with 4 , removable waste receptacle. Mounting: Recessed or Recessed with projecting receptacle. a. Designed for nominal 6 -inch wall depth. -�" 3'.- Minimum Towel- Dispenser Capacity: 600 C -fold or 800 multifold paper towels. " Minimum Waste - Receptacle Capacity: 4 gal. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste - receptacle liner. 7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel- dispenser compartment. D. Liquid -Soap Dispenser: 1. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 2. Mounting: Deck mounted on vanity. 3. Capacity: 12 oz. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2 1 L Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Materials: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicator: Window type. E. Grab Bar: 1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed or exposed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin). 3. Outside Diameter: 1 -1/2 inches. 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. F 2.3 A. Mirror Unit: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch thick Stainless -steel channel. a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft - resistant installation, using one of the methods indicated below. a. One - piece, galvanized - steel, wall- hanger device with sprinpction:: cking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or,, bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed Id6king device -0 requiring a special tool to remove. s :. 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. _j 0, CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES " ro Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products bys�ne of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. B. Mop and Broom Holder: 1. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 2. Length: 36 inches. 3. Hooks: Three. 4. Mop /Broom Holders: Four, spring - loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05 -inch- thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4 -inch- diameter stainless steel. �^ TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES �r 0 10801-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.4 FABRICATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full - length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion - resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. F, I D TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-4 1 END OF SECTION 10801 ' U-11 Lu y nrnamw r.; -. Q F, I D TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-4 1 low Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 13930 WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire - protection valves. `' �. .. 3. Fire - department connections. .... 4. Sprinklers. - 5. Alarm devices. ,.M e 6. Hose connections. _ 7. Pressure gages. 0 1.03 DEFINITIONS '' ') A. Standard - Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet -pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standard - Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175 -psig minimum working pressure. B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by NICET Level IV Technician or a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Evidence Storage Areas: Class IV commodities stored on racks over 15 feet and up to and including 20 feet. b. Secure Evidence Storage Areas: Miscellaneous storage of Class IV commodities up to 12 feet. C. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard. 2. Minimum Density for Automatic - Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Light- Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 -sq. ft. area. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-1 77 L.� Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa b. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. 4. Total Combined Hose - Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated: a. Light- Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes. b. Class IV Commodities: 100 gpm for 120 minutes. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.[ Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.] B. Shop Drawings: For wet -pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated- Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, NICET Level IV Technician, and professional engineer. E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. F. Fire - hydrant flow test report. Gc'4 FieldJest Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with pe wance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and TotLZertifcate for Aboveground Piping. LU H. R 14.quality- control reports. I.! Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, ] arihr aintenance manuals. 0 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire- hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a NICET Level IV Technician or a qualified professional engineer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-2 d Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Architect's and Owner's written permission. 1.09 COORDINATION , A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that peEOfrates aeilingf "' including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. — " °` 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are package&vith prgective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall- mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Standard Weight, Galvanized- and Black -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. B. Schedule 10, Black -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13- specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end. C. Black -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard- weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. D. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-3 C Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Uncoated, Gray -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. F. Malleable- or Ductile -Iron Unions: UL 860. G. Cast -Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125. H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. Grooved - Joint, Steel -Pipe Appurtenances: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Corcoran Piping System Co. C. National Fittings, Inc. d. Shurjoint Piping Products. e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. f. Victaulic Company. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved -End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable -iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved - End -Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM- rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts. 2.0:�4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS Ca R- Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick. 1E. 2 Class 125, Cast -Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat -Face Flanges: Full -face ' u - gaskets. :@ .,,o B.' Metal, Pipe - Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. Ll C. ✓` Mang Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for walaickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C-. .: 2.04 LISTED FIRE - PROTECTION VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard - Pressure Piping: 175 psig. B. Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc. 3. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2 -1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile -iron body with grooved ends. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-4 1 F" L waw L Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFAC Inc. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. C. Anvil International, Inc. d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. h. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. i. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. j. Milwaukee Valve Company. k. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. I. NIBCO INC. M. Potter Roemer. n. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. o. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. p. United Brass Works, Inc. q. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. �y r. Victaulic Company. S. Viking Corporation. t. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. cs 2. Standard: UL 312., 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. 4. Type: Swing check. -- F � 5. Body Material: Cast iron. . 6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 2.05 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES cr. 9 . M 10 A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. B. Angle Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fire Protection Products, Inc. b. United Brass Works, Inc. C. Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. C. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Potter Roemer. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J g. Red -White Valve Corporation. h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. i. Victaulic Company. j. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2.06 SPECIALTY VALVES n Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating: a. Standard - Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum. 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. B. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFAC Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. C. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 2. Standard: UL 1726. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check. 5. Size: NPS 3/4. 6. End Connections: Threaded. c1a 2.OP FIDE- DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS Mush -Type, Fire - Department Connection: 1i ;° Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the NO - 'T= following: a. AFAC Inc. U_ b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. c. GMR International Equipment Corporation. -- d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. e. Potter Roemer. 2. Standard: UL 405. 3. Type: Flush, for wall mounting. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 5. Body Material: Corrosion - resistant metal. 6. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire- department sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers. 7. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain. 8. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type. 9. Outlet: With pipe threads. 10. Body Style: Square. 11. Number of Inlets: Four. 12. Outlet Location: Bottom. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-6 1 C A F1 IIJ Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 13. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to " AUTO SPKR." 14. Finish: Rough brass or bronze. 15. Outlet Size: NPS 6. 2.08 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. National Fittings, Inc. C. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile -iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical -T and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap -on and strapless, ductile -iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connection as regy!ted to match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain -end pipe, or threaded. B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies: o• 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productg r one of th following: a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. 7Z •0 b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. C. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. -- d. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile -iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded. 2.09 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFAC Inc. 2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 5. Viking Corporation. B. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa 2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum. , C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat - Responsive Element: 1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2 -inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application. a. Orifice: 1/2 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8. b. Orifice: 17/32 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2. C. Orifice: 5/8 inch, with discharge coefficient K of 11.2. D. Sprinkler Finishes: 1. Chrome plated. 2. Bronze. 3. Painted. E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed -type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome - plated steel, one piece, flat. F.N Sprinkler Guards: CS 1. < Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following: a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. LU w + b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. ,0 c. Victaulic Company. -;d. Viking Corporation. _ w 2 Standard: UL 199. :.r 3 Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. 2.10 s_ ALARM DEVICES A. Alarm- device types shall match piping and equipment connections. , B. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with combination horn - strobe, with red - enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use. C. Water -Flow Indicators: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ADT Security Services, Inc. b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries. C. Potter Electric Signal Company. ' d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. e. Viking Corporation. f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc. 2. Standard: UL 346. ' 3. Water -Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Two single -pole, double -throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125 -V ac and 0.25 A, 24 -V dc; complete with factory-set, field- WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-8 1 r Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed. 5. Type: Paddle operated. 6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical. 2.11 HOSE CONNECTIONS A. Nonadjustable -Valve Hose Connections: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFAC Inc. b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. C. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. f. NIBCO INC. Ell g. Potter Roemer. h. Tyco Fire &Building Products LP. c °^ 2. Standard: UL 668 hose valve for connecting fire hose. 3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum. 4. Material: Brass or bronze. r " 5. Size: NPS 2 -1/2. - -` 6. Inlet: Female pipe threads. =. 7. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Incl le hoses valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire- department threads. -- 8. Pattern: Angle. 9. Finish: Rough brass or bronze. B. Cabinet: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fire End & Croker Corporation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. C. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc. f. Moon - American. g. Potter Roemer LLC. h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc. 2. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, recessed. a. 22 gage cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. b. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead. C. Finish: Electrostatically applied, thermally fused, white polyester finish. 3. Door Style: Center glass panel with frame, 20 gage frame. 4. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS it 13930-9 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J L Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa 5. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door - operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. a. Provide manufacturer's standard. b. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. 6. Accessories: a. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Identify cabinet with the words "Fire Department Valve ". 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Silk- screened or pressure- sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Horizontal. 2.12 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division. 2. Ashcroft, Inc. 3. Brecco Corporation. 4. WIKA Instrument Corporation. B. Standard: UL 393. C. Dial Size: 3 -1/2- to 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum. Wger System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face. U-1 PAR3 3 - UECUTION u— 3.0 1 ' P-BPPARATION P ' Pe&rm fire- hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article. J J B. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. C. Existing sprinkler systems serving the chlorine storage area and phosphate storage area shall remain in operation. Contractor shall coordinate system impairments to install new piping and , restore chlorine and phosphate storage systems to operation at the end of each work day. System impairments shall be limited to no more than 8 hours, and shall be coordinated in accordance with NFPA 25 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3.02 WATER- SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A. Connect sprinkler piping to existing double check valve located in Room 117. ' WET -PIPE FIRE- SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-10 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13. C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved -end piping on valvesppar4*, and equipment having NPS 2 -1/2 and larger end connections. ;.Za .4. C) > F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete wtl huts valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13. - �,� C,�,, r- M G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. H. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire- departmer conneA.},ion, to drain piping between fire- department connection and check valve. Install drain piping -to and spill over floor drain. 1. Install alarm devices in piping systems. J. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. K. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing. L. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. M. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire - Suppression Piping." N. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Fire - Suppression Piping." WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-11 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved -end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2 -1/2 and larger end connections. D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. N C*, F We ded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes "welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. { :R J; Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for LW ,O Mf galvanized -steel pipe. L._ &feel- Piping, Roll- Grooved Joints: Roll rounded -edge groove in end of pipe according to =. 7 A C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe -. an¢F_,grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel -pipe grooved joints. C. 3.05 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install listed fire- protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.06 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Coordinate removal of existing alarm device with fire alarm contractor. B. Install alarm devices in piping, and connect to existing fire alarm panel. Coordinate programming changes as necessary with the fire alarm contractor. 3.07 HOSE CONNECTION CABINET INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-12 11, Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Mount hose connection inside cabinet 4' -0" above finished floor to the centerline of the hose connection valve. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply at locations indicated. 3.08 HOSE - CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install wall- mounted -type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water - supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. 3.09 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. B. Sprinklers installed in light hazard occupancy shall be quick response type sprinkl4i. -i w� r C. Sprinklers installed in high storage areas shall be high temperature sprinklers -ji ed f6i" the application. rn O 3.10 FIRE - DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION : " A. Install wall -type, fire- department connections. B. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire- department connection. 3.11 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. PM WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-13 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Start and run excess - pressure pumps. 6. Coordinate with fire -alarm tests. Operate as required. 7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire- department equipment. C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. 3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Piping between Fire - Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard - weight steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved -end fittings; grooved- end -pipe couplings; and grooved joints. B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control vales, instead of specified fittings. C. Standard- pressure, wet -pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Standard- weight, black -steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray -iron threaded r a fittings; and threaded joints. j Stip—ndard- pressure, wet -pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the fopwing: Standard - weight, black -steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray -iron threaded --� fittings; and threaded joints. 2 Standard- weight, black -steel pipe with roll - grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings 0 for steel piping; grooved- end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 3. Schedule 10, black -steel pipe with roll- grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved- end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. E. Standard- pressure, wet -pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be the following: 1. Standard - weight, galvanized -steel pipe with cut - grooved ends; galvanized, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved- end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints for fire department connection piping. 2. Schedule 10, black -steel pipe with roll - grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved- end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 3.15 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications: 1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers. 3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-14 1 1�� L b Sri T ; PM E Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Special Applications: Extended - coverage, flow - control, and quick- response sprinklers where indicated. B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated. 1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory- painted white cover plate. 2. Upright and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. 3. High Temperature Sprinklers: For installation in Class IV commodity storage occupancies. END OF SECTION 13930 WET -PIPE FIRE - SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930-15 { Cr 13930-15 r� go Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J f� e PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. - 3 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Mechanical demolition. wy; 7.1 6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 7. Painting and finishing. - +� 8. Supports and anchorages. -- N1 G �1 1.03 DEFINITIONS y A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene - propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Escutcheons. Iowa City Police Storage Project , Iowa City, Iowa n 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." higher B. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified at the contractors' expense. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. 1.07c= CCIORDINATION :.y At- AT&ge for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. UJ B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place L „ chi rete and other structural components as they are constructed. O v Co8�inate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames.” PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME 81.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-2 1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME 816.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water- flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys fix gene duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for relevant` piping, unless otherwise indicated. _n F. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 4 y C' 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. im 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.04 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.05 SLEEVES A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.06 ESCUTCHEONS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One - Piece, Deep- Pattern Type: Deep- drawn, box - shaped brass with polished chrome - plated finish. C. One - Piece, Stamped -Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome - plated finish. D. Split - Plate, Stamped -Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome - plated finish. E. One - Piece, Floor -Plate Type: Cast -iron floor plate. F. Split- Casting, Floor -Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. CD 1 Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 10 3 'w ". Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. _ Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5 Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-4 I Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. ,..., G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. - C.1 . I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One - piece, deep - pattern type. b. Chrome - Plated Piping: One - piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome - plated finish. C. Insulated Piping: One - piece, stamped -steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One - piece, stamped -steel type. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One - piece, stamped -steel type or split - plate, stamped -steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One - piece, stamped -steel type with concealed or exposed -rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One - piece, stamped -steel type with set screw or spring clips. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One - piece, floor -plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: a. Chrome - Plated Piping: Split- casting, cast -brass type with chrome - plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split- plate, stamped -steel type with concealed or exposed -rivet hinge and spring clips. C. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split- plate, stamped -steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split- plate, stamped -steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split- plate, stamped -steel type with concealed or exposed -rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split- plate, stamped -steel type with set screw or spring clips. g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split- casting, floor -plate type. M. Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes. N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast -iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board partitions. _ 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe C) < or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. •. `4 Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. 0 Hre,Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at Jj ..0 Rape penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section I ?Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials. °. �.' Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. It- Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.03 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead - free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-6 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. 3.04 PIPING CONNECTIONS -,� A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated- 1 . Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at fgiiico6ectior�-- to each piece of equipment. .I I r-" 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves-and at final �1 connection to each piece of equipment. -- 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect pipi'tnate49ls of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to onnecti Iping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.06 PAINTING A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting (Consumer Line Products)." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.07 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. C, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION 15050 u en LL ^ J x BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-8 1 5 e•* Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15055 MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory- and field- installed motors. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Factory- Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized - equipment manufpcturer`y�a. a-�- component of equipment." r.... i1 1.04 SUBMITTALS �k 1 A. Product Data for Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate dap and riongs; shipping, installed, and operating weights; bearing information; performance curves with"wer factor and efficiency at various loads; enclosure type and mounting arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes. B. Shop Drawings for Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following: 1. Each installed unit's type and details. 2. Nameplate legends. 3. Diagrams of power, signal, and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of motor and for each control scheme. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation, and maintenance manuals. Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply with the following: 1. Compatible with the following: a. Magnetic controllers. b. Multispeed controllers. C. Reduced - voltage controllers. 2. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belt tensioning. MOTORS r� �r 15055-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Baldor. 2. Century. 3. General Electric. 4. Louis Allis. 5. Reliance. 6. Toshiba. 7. Westinghouse. 2.02 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Motor requirements apply to factory- and field- installed motors except as follows: 1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another Section. 2. Motorized - equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified. 2.03 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A M6fors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase. w ,_�© rs Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase. U J Ga P- 4quenc Y 9= 60 Hz. Rating: 1K_ ®Itage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which rt or is connected. t�. Service Factor: Minimum 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. Maximum temperature rise shall not exceed 40 deg C for open type, 50 deg C for drip -proof and splash -proof type, and 55 deg C for explosion proof and totally enclosed types. G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. H. Enclosure: Open dripproof. I. Sound Power Levels: To ANSI /NEMA MG 1. Motors shall be quiet operating, measured in accordance with IEEE Standard 85, sound tests taken at no -load operation. 2.04 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. MOTORS 15055-2 11 h Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1. Meet or exceed values in Table 12 -6 of NEMA MG 12 at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI /IEEE 112. C. Nominal Power Factor: Meet or exceed values in Table 12 -6 of NEMA MG 12 at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI /IEEE 112. D. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed. E. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. F. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti - friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L -10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V -belt pulley with belt centerline at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, except motor rating shall be based on Gt ss B insulation temperature rise. H. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.' I. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characterisficJ -I'l n J. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller1han 7.51ip. 1. Finish: Gray enamel. 2.05 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced - Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Rugged -Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non - hygroscopic material. 1. Finish: Chemical- resistant paint over corrosion - resistant primer. C. Source Quality Control for Field- Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: 1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no -load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. Perform high- potential test. 2.06 SINGLE -PHASE MOTORS A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor oft application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split -phase start, capacitor run. MOTORS 15055-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Shaded -Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only. C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal - protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. D. Bearings: Ball type for belt- connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated- sleeve type for other single -phase motors. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 15055 MOTORS 15055-4 0 LL -0 u 0 MOTORS 15055-4 e EJ Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. _ 4. Thermal- hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. n - 6. Pipe positioning systems. 7. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections include the following: `..a- 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and pl4f for ir:rapezJJ hangers for pipe and equipment supports. "= 2. Division 13 Section "Fire- Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire - protection ping. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration iso ation devices. 4. Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal- hanger shield inserts. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory- fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen -Power Pipe Supports. 3.- B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4~' Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. SCU Empire Industries, Inc. I .,� 6s - ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co. 7(• Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. & ~~ Grinnell Corp. 9 M GS Metals Corp. 1'0? National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. — PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.03 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop- or field - fabricated pipe- support assembly made from structural -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-2 L FZJ PW LO 9 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.04 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Description: MFMA -3, shop- or field- fabricated pipe - support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power -Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Tolco Inc. 7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicate`(! ' qq D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.05 THERMAL - HANGER SHIELD INSERTS _T A. Description: 100 -psig- minimum, compressive- strength insulation insert encased sleet metal shield. ra B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation -insert Material for Cold Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. D. Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.06 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Mechanical- Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type zinc - coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J b. Empire Industries, Inc. C. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.07 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications. B. Manufacturers: 1. C & S Mfg. Corp. 2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 3. Samco Stamping, Inc. 2.08 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field- fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS �Wtural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. �G. O Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink and fit.: cr gtnetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2 Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. PAIN 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field - applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-4 1 i_1 P" Le Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy - Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off - center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid -Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Split Pipe -Ring with or without Turnbuckle- Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 8. Extension Hinged or 2 -Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 318 to NPS 3. 9. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 10. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to; a cPans n or-n contraction. i- G. Vertical- Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified irt-�Mng s4� tem l Sections, install the following types: - �,= 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers N S.,&4 to NPS 20. For copper pipes, use copper riser clamps. > 2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NRS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable -Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C- Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar -joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. C- Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Top -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 7. Side -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I- beams. 8. Steel -Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel (- beams for heavy loads. ro HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 0 15060-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 9. Linked -Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel (- beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 10. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 11. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 12. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 13. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe- Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not ^, specified in piping system Sections. �,65mply with MFMA -102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not Ycified in piping system Sections. LU .M.se mechanical- expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete M ,,j�wstruction. 5_1 a pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and v@ste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field- fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field- assembled metal framing systems. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-6 M_ Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa D. Thermal- Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install mechanical - expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded - structural -steel shapes.) c. I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic mov6mept of4,iping -n systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to fadllita#e ac4ion o expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. �y K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. tostall additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2412 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME 831.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal- hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME 831.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal- hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight - distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal- hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight - distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal- Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.03 A. B. 3.04 A. B. C. CD p a 5 3.0 C,. iw B. 3.06 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. METAL FABRICATIONS Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3, Remove welding flux immediately. ZO Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. D LISTING . 9 er Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve ��.�9 1 1 9 q Y indipated slope of pipe. Trim excess length of continuous - thread hanger and support rods to 1 -1/2 inches. For support rods exposed in areas where the rod may interfere with foot - traffic, trim rod and grind flush to securing nut. PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field- painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-8 a 11" fir' Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J —0 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts. 2. Restrained vibration isolation roof -curb rails. - w.:,. 1.03 SUBMITTALS y k i A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device. ° ,,,:; 0 „a B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators iri for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, and spring deflection changes. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ace Mounting Co., Inc. 2. Amber /Booth Company, Inc. MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3. B -Line Systems, Inc. 4. California Dynamics Corp. 5. Isolation Technology, Inc. 6. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 7. Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 9. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Mountings & Controls /Korfund. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Elastomeric Mounts: Double- deflection type, with molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements with factory- drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Durometer Rating: 45. 2.03 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF -CURB RAILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amber /Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corp. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls /Korfund. 15P Delkription: Factory- assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed tt��iliently support equipment and to withstand 125 -mph wind impinging laterally against side Q, equipment. C Lb "r Support Assembly: Sheet -metal "T' section containing adjustable and removable steel sorii�s that support upper floating frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for equpement and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. Lower support assbly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof-materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass -fiber insulation on inside of assembly. D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4 -inch- thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof. 1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open- spring isolators with seismic restraint. a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt. b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. C. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071-2 E L C r e f Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water- resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. a. Material: Standard neoprene. b. Durometer Rating: 45. C. Number of Layers: 2. E. Snubber Bushings: All- directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick. F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed6over roof materials.? 2.04 FACTORY FINISHES -y -- 71 A. Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting. °' fi -' f a -�. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory- assembled and - teE&c1J'" equi�pment0 before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. y 2. All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot -dip galvanize metal components for Jxlerior use. 3. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color -code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic - control devices to indicate capacity range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic - control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in -place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." B. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile -iron clamps to "' hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods. MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 -3 0 t �`i i Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight. B. Adjust active height of spring isolators. C. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces. 3.04 CLEANING A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic - control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3.05 VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC - RESTRAINT SCHEDULE VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION TYPE STATIC DEFLECTION INCHES Roof Mounted Equipment Restrained vibration isolation roof curb 2" Floor Mounted Equipment Elastomeric mount 1/4" END OF SECTION 15071 0 r MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071-4 4W Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. Equipment nameplates. ..,., 2. Access panel and door markers. 0 3 3. Pipe markers. 4. Duct markers. 5. Valve tags.:•. 0- 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identi cation material and device. C. Valve numbering scheme. D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. Z, MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075-1 r� Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 1. Data: a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. C. Labels of tested compliances. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment. F�'� e 2.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. 1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full -band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. c' 4. < Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type df) pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. r 5 ��' _.Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or A , �. ": as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. B. Ptet2.msioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pillo.,gnd to attach to pipe without adhesive. C'' Shap>rd Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier. D. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure- sensitive, permanent -type, self- adhesive back. 1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum. 2.03 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color -coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact -type, permanent adhesive. 2.04 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Owner. Provide 5/32 -inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032 -inch- thick brass. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075-2 1 W Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 0, Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Valve -Tag Fasteners: Brass wire -link or beaded chain; or S -hook. 2.05 VALVE SCHEDULES A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard -size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal- operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve- Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws. 2. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5 -mm, single- thickness glass. PART 3 - EXECUTION — 3.01 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL _ A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections, -If mq�e that single -type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, select+stn7s Installer'n option. 0 �. 3.02 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION y,. iv A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment: 1. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. 2. Packaged HVAC central- station and zone -type units. B. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels. 3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow. 1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit. B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 6_ Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers. 3.04 VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory- fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn- watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing -in connections of end -use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve -Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 1. Valve -Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1 -1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1 -1/2 inches, round. 2. Valve -Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural. 3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: White. b. Hot Water: White. 3.05 VALVE - SCHEDULE INSTALLATION A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room. 3.060;, AW. STING ti/ ,; Af;W@ate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by .fd :� Z otNr work. x .07 i C1�NING U" ' A Ckear faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules. END OF SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075-4 r' u F Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber. 2. Insulating cements. ...3 3 3. Adhesives. ' 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. -.7 •.. 6. Sealants. '; ;; a.. 7. Factory- applied jackets. 8. Field- applied jackets. -- 9. Tapes. ` 10. Securements. N B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASJ: All- service jacket. B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. C. SSL: Self- sealing lap. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following: 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 3. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 4. Application of field- applied jackets. 5. Application at linkages of control devices. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 6. Field application for each equipment type. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics with a minimum of five years experience. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame- spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate cD ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.076 C010- DINATION i:", A. CQQrdinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in 4� DiVislon 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coom inate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct C .,. Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field- applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-2 4 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. D. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded- rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. , 1. Manufacturers: =, a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LLC. 1: C. RBX Corporation. i,.. 2. Materials: :' ' a Cr a. Density: 3.0 to 6.0 pounds per cubic foot. s5- b. Surface burning characteristics: Flame spread: 25; smoke develop 0. =' C. "k" factor at 75 deg F: 0.27 BTU- in /hr- ft2 -F. -; d. Water vapor permeability: 0.08 perm -in. e. Exterior use jacket: Thermoplastic rubber membrane, with resistance to ultfdviolet light, ozone, and chemical compounds, white color for thermal reflectance. E. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory- applied FSK jacket. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Johns Manville. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning. 2. Materials: a. Will not support microbial growth. b. Density: 0.75 or 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. C. Surface burning characteristics: Flame spread: 25; smoke developed: 50. d. Y factor at 75 deg F: 0.24 BTU- in /hr- ft2 -F. e. Jacket water vapor permeability: 0.02 perm -in. f. Water vapor sorption: Less than 5% by weight when exposed to air at 120 deg F and 95 percent RH for 96 hours. F. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory- applied FSK jacket. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in ., Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corp. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa b. Johns Manville. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning. 2. Materials: a. Will not support microbial growth. b. Density: 6.0 pounds per cubic foot. C. Surface burning characteristics: Flame spread: 25; smoke developed: 50. d. "k" factor at 75 deg F: 0.23 BTU- in /hr- ft2 -F_ e. Jacket water vapor permeability: 0.02 perm -in. f. Water vapor sorption: Less than 5% by weight when exposed to air at 120 deg F and 95 percent RH for 96 hours. G. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf Insulation. C. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning. 2. Materials: a. Will not support microbial growth. b. Surface burning characteristics: Flame spread: 25; smoke developed: 50. C. "k" factor at 75 deg F: 0.23 BTU- in /hr- ft2 -F. C) d. Jacket water vapor permeability: 0.02 perm -in. e. Water vapor sorption: Less than 0.2% by volume. -' Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. fj Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory- applied ASJ -SSL. Factory- 1 _J applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. -0 f 2.03 II Sgl_ATING CEMENTS A Whin al -Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1. -- Manufacturers: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Incl. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc. B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. 1. Manufacturers: a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc. C. Mineral- Fiber, Hydraulic- Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1. Manufacturers: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.. C. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company. 2.04 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-4 r� Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Manufacturers: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LCC. C. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. d. RBX Corporation. C. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. <— b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. 'rn E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 0 1. Manufacturers: w a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Johns - Manville. C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Red Devil, Inc. e. Speedline Corporation. 2.05 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL- C- 19565C, Type II. B. Vapor- Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. f. Vimasco Corporation. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 3 "' MECHANICAL INSULATION 0 15080-5 Howard R_ Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.06 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL- A -3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. Marathon Industries, Inc. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Fire - resistant, water -based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire - resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. B. FSK Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. Marathon Industries, Inc. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water - resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-6 LJ 2.07 SEALANTS o �A. < JQtnt Sealants: 'I Joint Sealants for Cellular - Glass: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. Marathon Industries, Inc. .,.� d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Ic" 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. B. FSK Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. C. Marathon Industries, Inc. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water - resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-6 LJ Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water - resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 2.08 FACTORY - APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory- applied jackets on various applications. When factory- applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft - paper, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.09 FIELD - APPLIED JACKETS ~a A. Field- applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise Indicted ` or B. PVC Jacket: High- impact- resistant, UV- resistant PVC complying with- °AcSTM D 1784n Class 16354 -C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cuttirX Ind 15rmin Thickness is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules. 0 - 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville. w b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. C. Proto PVC Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color -code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect. 4. Factory- fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories. 2.10 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Manufacturers: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corp. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. r" " MECHANICAL INSULATION 60 3 iitr 15080-7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf /inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Manufacturers: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corp. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf /inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching field- applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Manufacturers: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corp. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 2 inches. c' Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesion: 64 ounces force /inch in width. Elongation: 500 percent. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf /inch in width. UL! 6 2.14 .: SECUREMENTS �A rulation Pins and Hangers: 1 _- Capacitor- Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully annealed for z...; capacitor- discharge welding, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 2. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-8 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless -steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.03 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. 0 B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicips ftses4quirech for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in t atio�h systewo— schedules. r� w% ;�2 �' C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the..svice =lost 1T accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jackeP y ith%wet or dry state. yp -� w D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor - barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor- barrier mastic. wr 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. f ' MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-9 r0 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. Install insulation with factory- applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - sealing lap. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor- barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Terminate insulation immediately below roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Firestopping and fire- resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through - Penetration Firestop Systems." D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-10 O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches C similar to butt joints. Ero �bove ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: �' -� `= Vibration- control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. a -�o 3,::1 Nameplates and data plates. j 4.. `. Manholes. 5­,° Handholes. ETa Cleanouts. 3.04c 1' PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Terminate insulation immediately below roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Firestopping and fire- resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through - Penetration Firestop Systems." D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-10 tw Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.05 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: r 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other - eciat> s wit . continuous thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicat" d:� °i �- 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings' a6e front sanj�" material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall utteT tight against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids✓ nd - gulvpn surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform ntour that uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insklation �F same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to�it. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor- barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric - reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well- shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field- applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. MECHANICAL INSULATION 0 15080-11 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. 3.06 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Use sheet -type elastomeric insulation for duct and plenum insulation. Elastomeric insulation used on exterior ductwork/plenums shall have the exterior use membrane jacket. Sheet on top of duct/plenum shall cover the top edge of the side sheets. Sheets on side of duct/plenum shall cover the side edges of the bottom sheet. B. Secure insulation to surfaces of ducts and plenums using manufacturer's required adhesive. C. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: CD 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. < Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the c5 ,p thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of �= - adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness ;, as pipe insulation. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive °to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. E. "_': Insutition Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. F. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.07 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-12 0 4" Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe ihsbiatipAwheu. available. -- r 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install eli�ored stectionip— of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. E �G e in &ulatio materials with wire or bands. r�- D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pip insulate— when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: 1. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with FSK tape. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor - barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor- barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 2. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 3. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-13 %W 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with insulation pins. 1. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers, or cupped -head capacitor- discharge -weld pins, or adhesively secured base plates on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 2. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with FSK tape. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- ' barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot -' intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor- barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped u.1 r pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. ' 3 Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section I R or each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and �- Inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with — individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 4. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c_ 3.08 FIELD - APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3 -inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor- retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor- barrier mastic. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-14 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.09 FINISHES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. 3.10 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed and exposed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, concealed and exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. Insulate ductwork beginning 10' — 0" before the building penetration (wall or roof), and extend to the building penetration. 3. Indoor, concealed and exposed exhaust upstream of penetration of building exterior. Insulate ductwork beginning 10' — 0" before the building penetration (wall or roof), and extend to the building penetration. 4. Outdoor, concealed and exposed supply and return. B. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Fire -stop systems are specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." C. Items Not Insulated: _ 9 � 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with en�e 9y code anti =' ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1. w 0- t 2. Factory- insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory- insulated plenums and casings. M 4. Flexible connectors. ,� ,.a 5. Vibration - control devices. y 6. Factory- insulated access panels and doors. w 3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed and exposed, round and flat -oval, supply -air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: Duct sizes 10- inches diameter and larger: 1 -1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: Duct sizes 9- inches diameter and smaller: 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density B. Concealed and exposed, round and flat -oval, exhaust -air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: Duct sizes 10- inches diameter and larger: 2 inches thick and 1.5- lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: Duct sizes 9- inches diameter and smaller: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density 3. Vapor retarder required. 4. Insulation shall begin 10' -0" before the building penetration (wall or roof), and extend to the building termination. C. Concealed and exposed, rectangular, supply -air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density for concealed applications; 6-lb/cu. ft. nominal density for exposed applications. 2. Vapor retarder required. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-15 Iliw y C Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa D. Concealed and exposed, rectangular, exhaust -air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density for concealed applications; 6-lb/cu. ft. nominal density for exposed applications. 2. Vapor retarder required. 3. Insulation shall begin 10' -0" before the building penetration (wall or roof), and extend to the building termination. 3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire - suppression piping. 2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 3.13 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral -Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. 2. NPS 2 inches and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: CD a. Mineral -Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick. C) B. -- Do nestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: L. — 1. i.0 NPS 1 -1/2 inch and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: R c a. Mineral -Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. C. `; Cohdensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: 1.`y;l All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be any of the following: C Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. -G. Mineral -Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. D. Heating- Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick. E. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be any of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Mineral -Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. 3.14 INDOOR, FIELD - APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory- applied jacket, install the field - applied jacket over the factory- applied jacket. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-16 rr i Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Concealed: 1. PVC: 30 mils thick, fittings only. iIw D. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 30 mils thick, fittings only. END OF SECTION 15080 _ rw9 C ry t..li MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-17 r 60 000 ifto itrr r q Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15110 VALVES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general -duty valves: 1. Copper -alloy ball valves. 2. Bronze check valves. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 13 fire- suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire - protection valves. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts. 3. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and actuators. 4. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. F 0 -, 1.03 DEFINITIONS "'..� A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves: 1. CWP: Cold working pressure. w; r -- 2. EPDM: Ethylene - propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. rat 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. 4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 5. SWP: Steam working pressure. _ 6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: ASME 831.9 for building services piping valves. 1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold- water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping valves unless referenced. B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. VALVES 15110-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew -point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS �A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. ,j, 2.023 (VY ,LVES, GENERAL '13efer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves. Braze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2 -1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. F. Valve Actuators: 1. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves. 2. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head. G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. 2.03 COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Two - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: F-1 Fi VALVES 15110-2 1 C �r+ iwr Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. DynaQuip Controls. f. Flow -Tek, Inc. g. Grinnell Corporation. h. Hammond Valve. i. Honeywell Braukmann. j. Jamesbury, Inc. -- k. Jomar International, LTD. I. Kitz Corporation of America.,; M. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. 0 _u; .�.,- n. Milwaukee Valve Company. m C' o. Nexus Valve Specialties. _< } p. NIBCO INC. FTI q. R & M Energy Systems (Borger, TX). x , Q r. Red -White Valve Corp. O S. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves. w t. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP -110. C. Two- Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full -port, chrome - plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem. 2.04 BRONZE CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP -80. C. Type 4, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. VALVES w B 15110-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.02 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. B.c :,, If vaKes with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves wit, ©gher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. R C. D66nestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: •o 1.f; t- °Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two - piece, 600 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. _ 2,_w USwing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze. D. ' 1-164&N Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. _Ball Valves, NPS 3 and Smaller: Two - piece, 600 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze. E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder -joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for condenser water, heating hot water, steam, and steam condensate services. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 3 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. VALVES 15110-4 i f: ww A t. Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water - flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 15110 VALVES 15110-5 r-) j """ n, G W 15110-5 "M AN Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section 'Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. €. S t 1.04 SUBMITTALS w ;: A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. C, r.... _ M B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article. 7 C. Field quality - control test reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 'Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-1 i Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME 816.18, cast - copper -alloy or ASME 816.22, wrought - copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought - copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast - copper - alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball -and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. 2.04 VALVES A. Bronze and cast -iron, general -duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 0 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and soldered < joints. 2,.. r NPS 1 -1/4 and NPS 1 -1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and s soldered joints. LLI 3' . s NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. —A 3.02 1 VALVE APPLICATIONS Clw,, = r r A: ` Di iWings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the `7 foI16v*ing requirements apply: ` 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Hot - Water- Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves_ 4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop- and -waste drain valves where indicated. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Install under - building -slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-2 In *M iw Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J C. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. 3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water - flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." 0 ON iiw C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. ,... D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3 41, i eh. C, A NJ M E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacird mi�imu rod diameters: lrJ 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. > 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. Use copper riser clamps for copper tubing. G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.06 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. W C. Connect domestic water piping to water - service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot -water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." """" 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-3 0, Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and < unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4E2 Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, III - without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and .r� ' - allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must i be repaired. 5 -° Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable and non - potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-4 1 F om 40 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. C. Flush system with clean, potable water until the chlorine level in the water leaving the system matches the chlorine level in the water entering the system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Provide copies of reports to Owner. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING _ FD T ") r w� e —�; F 0 15140-5 IN Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Water hammer arresters. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unles.A- Qtherwise indicated. — 1.04 SUBMITTALS Q j A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. .c C. Field quality- control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9." DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Wafts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI -WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows. 0 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through For PDI -WH 201, Sizes A through F. PAF63 - UMUTION -0 3.01 II'TALLATION NO ._. - A! Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI -WH 201. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. END OF SECTION 15145 r DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-2 1 IN Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping. �..°i 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 9 '` - o'er 6 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following min66a i wo*ing pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 -foot head of water. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. B. Field quality - control inspection and test reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF- drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF- tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF- sewer" for plastic sewer piping. C. For cast iron soil pipe, the collective trademark of CISPI, and the date of manufacture. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 'Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.03 HUB - AND - SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es). B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2.04 HUBLESS CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISP1310, with stainless -steel corrugated shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. ,F a. Manufacturers: -- 1) ANACO. U-1 2) Fernco, Inc. i 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. t „ 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. .,. 0 2.05 c``~ COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast - copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought - copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, copper- alloy, hexagonal -stock body with ball- and - socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. 2.06 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-2 ' 4 A Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and hubless- coupling joints. 2. Copper tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and hubless - coupling joints. 2. Copper tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3 -1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following -. 1. Service class, cast -iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. c7 2. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION y 0, A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section " BaSicf- Nech�oical Materials and Methods. ", B. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handtok," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." C. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn, double Y- branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. D. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. E. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. F. Sleeves are not required for cast -iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs -on -grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. G. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.03 A. B. C. D. E. 3.04 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa JOINT CONSTRUCTION Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. Join hubless cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless- coupling joints. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water- flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." U-% Q�_ �Ld ort vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. Id riiameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. E.1 lnslll hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rots 4ameters: 1. NPS 1 -114: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. ice:` NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. ` 3. NPS 2 -1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet, use copper riser clamps. G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-4 1 7 L Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .'J A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspb�tioncmust ..�., be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: -' r= 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing $� "closiig -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdictionh4o ob rve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.> '•? B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test a't inspesion, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent -stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg. Use U -tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-5 L rM Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 15150 r10 hi =" E 'U p 5�J! LL c, 0 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-6 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15155 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. B. FRP: Fiberglass- reinforced plastic. cT. C. HDPE: High- density polyethylene plastic. - =' -0 D. PE: Polyethylene plastic. E. PP: Polypropylene plastic. F. PUR: Polyurethane plastic. G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control test reports. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NSF 14, 'Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary and storm piping specialty components. DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-1 a Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. B. Metal Floor Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C_ a. Josam Company; Josam Div. L11% <b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. _ r,• Ca. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. " Z LlI e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 10 ,;'-f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. ._ I Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. :a , h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. .;Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for adjustable housing cast -iron soil pipe with cast -iron "w Cferrule cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet Connection: Spigot. 8. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set - screws or other device. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel- bronze, copper alloy. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. C. Cast -Iron Floor Drains: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-2 1 e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4- inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1- inch total depression. DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES irr 15155-3 d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div- e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Anchor Flange: Required. 7. Clamping Device: Required. 8. Outlet: Bottom. 9. Sediment Bucket: Required for floor drains in mechanical rooms and janitor c65;�ts. 1`; 10. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron for service areas, nickel bronze for restroo►rr'ereasr 11. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze for restroom areas. 0 0*s 12. Top Shape: Round. 13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 14. Trap Material: Cast iron or PVC - , 15. Trap Pattern: Deep -seal P -trap or Standard P -trap. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4- inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1- inch total depression. DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES irr 15155-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. G. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. H. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep - pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. o~ 3.04x' PROTECTION O A Pjptect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and taVmvent damage from traffic or construction work. Lu I B. PI plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15155 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-4 A" 4 C7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Hot -water heating piping. 2. Condensate -drain piping. -., B. Related Sections include the following:° 1. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories`` o ; hy4dnic .�. piping. i. 01 d 1.03 DEFINITIONS rRr- A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. J `` 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Hot -Water Heating Piping: 125psig at 200 deg F. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement. 2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive. 3. Pressure -seal fittings. 4. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated - orifice balancing valves and automatic flow - control valves. 5. Hydronic specialties. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Field quality - control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special - duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. im HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Wily., A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Iowa City Police Storage Project ■ Iowa City, Iowa Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn - Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, or ASTM B88, Type M. B. cr Wrou9pt- Copper Fittings: ASME 816.22. 4' 1. ;Vanufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Ilowing: Anvil International, Inc. 'b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. Victaulic Company of America. j,R.. C. = Wr �gght- Copper Unions: ASME 816.22. 2.02 �= STEEL-PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME 816.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. C. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME 816.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water- flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-2 ri e Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2.04 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper -alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Victaulic Company of America. 2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 2.05 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements �pEj�ified+ 'W, Division 15 Section "Valves." j ca.. &m-- s �� -- -n B. Automatic Temperature - Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with regrjems �? specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls." ='- C. Bronze, Calibrated - Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. C. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. 2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. D. Automatic Flow - Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. C. Nexus Controls. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa W 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 1 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F. 2.06 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Taco. 2. Body: Bronze. 3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 5. < Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 6.,,,, Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. w _ 7.6: 2CWP Rating: 150 psig. == 8.L`J "Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. B. + AgtO*ic Air Vents: t a 1. ! - .w - Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the pJollowing: 08. Spirotherm. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 4. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 7. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 2.07 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y- Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-4 1 4 r� Ez M Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and soldered or pressure- seal joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable -iron fittings; and threaded joints. B. Condensate -Drain Piping: Type L, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought - copper fittings, and soldered joints. C. Blowdown -Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed. D. Air -Vent Piping: 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal -to- plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Outlet: Type K, annealed- temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joint{ 3.02 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply- gon*tion a to each piece of equipment. rn B. Install calibrated - orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or co(Riterrgjgal. C. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 15 Section "Valves." Cl- Q.Lr, Inst4 unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of ` e ent, and elsewhere as indicated. € R. Ins�lrstrainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure- reducing valve, solenoid valve, in- ..: L_ � line pp, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown con ., ion of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers sm ethan NPS 2. g S. :` Identify-piping as specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 4. Provide copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-6 1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa D. Install hangers for drawn - temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot intervals between floors. 3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe andfitjgs b3fore assembly. L D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indiratgd, t�,tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handboot('E 'asing lead - free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. 0.7,J E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME $1.20.1." Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and r Atore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 3.06 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat - transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting. 3.07 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: HYDRONIC PIPING IP 15181-7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J n Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Leave joints uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping." c- 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, U1% > joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing p components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6@ Prepare written report of testing. Y' ♦ ' e:.. C:° Pe'r�erm the following before operating the system: ' Open en manual valves full � P Y. JJ_ 2:-- Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3.`° Set makeup pressure- reducing valves for required system pressure. M.._ 4. — Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-8 1 A Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa w SECTION 15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY, 0 '3 A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air - conditioning applications. . _ N' 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ` ' ► �. A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-41 OA: t 1. Suction Lines for Air - Conditioning Applications: 300 psig. 2. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following: 1. Thermostatic expansion valves. 2. Capacity reduction device. 3. Filter dryers. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot. 2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. C. Field quality - control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." B. Comply with ASME B31.5, 'Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." REFRIGERANT PIPING IN 15183-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.06 A. PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR. B. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME 816.22. C. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME 816.22. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. E. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin - bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned - bronze - wire - reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 -inch misalignment in minimum 7 -inch- long assembly. vd. Pi*ssure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. &5. .AUximurn Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. :4AL\tg�,AND SPECIALTIES P� 5 - -A. Servige Valves: 4W' _Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. tt' O-F'e: Removable ball -type check valve with stainless -steel spring. S (@t: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4 End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. B. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non - asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F, adjustable. 6. Superheat: Adjustable. 7. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig. C. Moisture /Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. n REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183-2 1 E Howard R. Green Company p Y Iowa City Police Storage Protect Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. D. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted -steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless -steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 2.03 A. A REFRIGERANTS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc. 2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. 5. Refron, Inc. ASHRAE 34, R-41 OA: Pentafluoroethane /Difluoromethane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A t.� f T1 c.� r-- �i `t7 to A. Suction Lines NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air - Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with brazed joints. B. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type, annealed- or drawn - temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with brazed joints. 3.02 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot -gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers. B. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction -line pressure at bulb location. REFRIGERANT PIPING 0 15183-3 _–n i— M Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Install moisture /liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. D. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor. E. Install flexible connectors at compressors. F. Install capacity control device in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. co F D. .' Instalt.-piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right °' an*' :)or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated othprope. E. '0 Insfailjp-iping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. z F. Instatl�iping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. O G. c-- Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Refer to Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation" for control wiring, and sequence of operation. K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183-4 1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid -valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion -valve bulb. Q. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section "Through - Penetration Firestop Systems." S. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangs or between—,, pipes for insulation installation. = T. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation c �,{AI- thi&nessM insulation. r° U. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 7 Section "Joie SealaA" for materials and methods. V. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BcuP, copper - phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium -free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. IM t'' REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.05 A. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. ` Test§,and Inspections: 1. Z kComply with ASME 831.5, Chapter VI. 2.. ,. r-,-,Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, .i -'- evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test - -pressure. i 3. -, -:Test high- and low- pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the - "pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. y System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of —' test. C. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 3.07 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter -dryer core in charging line. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. P, REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183-6 1 ri Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430-J Iowa City, Iowa B. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. REFRIGERANT PIPING END OF SECTION 15183 rub 3 01, ri 0 "�J `0 15183-7 rI 1" Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY _,J A. This Section includes the following: 1. Close- coupled, in -line centrifugal pumps. s': i .... t... 1.03 DEFINITIONS 0 0- r A. Buna -N: Nitrile rubber. 0 ,!,a 2z B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185-1 10 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed -in plugs. B. Store pumps in dry location. C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage. D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter. E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 0:) CLOSE - COUPLED, IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS Lr% < A.&, ManKacturers: = Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2." 'i > Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. Usk o 3.w. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 4..w ',)Patterson Pump Co.; a Subsidiary of The Gorman -Rupp Co. _J 5. `- ,Taco, Inc. 6.,J � -: `Thrush Company Inc. B.`_ Description: Factory - assembled and - tested, centrifugal, overhung - impeller, close - coupled, in- line pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 175 -psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F. C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion -flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless -steel spring, and Buna -N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185-2 J-0, n a r Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa D. Motor: Single speed, with grease - lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 2.03 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body and end cap, pump - inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless -steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless -steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- fabricated support. B. Triple -Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body, pump - discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze -fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement. PART 3 - EXECUTION C� 7 3.01 EXAMINATION ,, A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor -bolt locations for compliance with r���uiieme�4ts forr" °"1 °:, o� installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. _ r ,l B. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping conr6*ns before pump installation. C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers requirements. B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Install continuous- thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." E. Suspend horizontally mounted, in -line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal. Use continuous - thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." F. Suspend vertically mounted, in -line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous - thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." 3.03 ALIGNMENT A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made. B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1- 1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation." D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. co 07N ln*II piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 6. �- erect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. IJAJ Q0 k*all suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E ' Ifl t @ll triple -duty valve on discharge side of pumps. Instill Y -type strainer and suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base - mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure -gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.05 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185-4 1irY poll L L w S S Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. C. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly. END OF SECTION 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 -5 a` 6-71 y 15185 -5 F Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components. _ .a 0 B. Related Sections include the following: c 1. Division 10 Section Toilet and Bath Accessories. 2. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers." 3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor t#rainzl and I specialty fixtures not included in this Section. - ` M +: 1.03 DEFINITIONS .= A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by peon with disabilities. B. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general -duty valves are included where indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow - control rates. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities "; Public Law 90480, "Architectural Barriers Act "; and Public Law 101- 336, "Americans with Disabilities Act'; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. PLUMBING FIXTURES 0 15410-1 G Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102 -486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -- Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Vitreous -China Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.2M. 2. Water - Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME Al 12.19.5. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 2. NSF Potable -Water Materials: NSF 61. 3. Pipe Threads: ASME 81.20.1. 4. Supply Fittings: ASME Al 12.18.1. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME Al 12.18.2. co Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for n)ISvellaneous fittings: Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME Al 12.18.1. 2.•:- ` Manual- Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 3... Brass Waste Fittings: ASME Al 12.18.2. I CgMply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for c;.. misctiellaneous components: t : 1. -'Off -Floor Fixture Supports: ASME Al 12.6.1 M. 2. Pipe Threads: ASME 81.20.1. 3. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 4. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 LAVATORY FAUCETS A. Lavatory Faucets: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. C. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Eljer. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Grohe America, Inc. h. Just Manufacturing Company. i. Kohler Co. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-2 8 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa j. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2. Description: Single- control mixing valve. Include hot- and cold -water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. Body Material: General -duty, solid brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. C. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm. d. Centers: 4 inches. e. Mounting: Deck, exposed. f. Valve Handle(s): Lever. g. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing, with NPS 1/2 male adaptor. h. Spout: Rigid type. i. Spout Outlet: Aerator. w '° j. Operation: Compression, manual. °°- k. Drain: Grid, offset. 2.02 SINK FAUCETS — 1' -7 A. Sink Faucets: by 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products one cfthe following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. C. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Eljer. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Fisher Manufacturing Co. h. Grohe America, Inc. i. Just Manufacturing Company. j. Kohler Co. k. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. I. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2. Description: Service sink faucet with stops in shanks, vacuum breaker, hose - thread outlet, and pail hook. Include hot- and cold -water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. C. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated. d. Mixing Valve: Two -lever handle. e. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Required. f. Centers: 8 inches. g. Mounting: Back/floor, exposed. h. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches. i. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 112 male adapter. j. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace. k. Spout Outlet: Hose thread, with 36" long hose. I. Vacuum Breaker: Required. M. Operation: Compression, manual. n. Drain: Grid. 9 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 -3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2.03 FLUSHOMETERS j A. Flushometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Coyne & Delany Co. b. Delta Faucet Company. C. Hydrotek International, Inc. d. Sloan Valve Company. e. TOTO USA, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2. Description: Flushometer for urinal and water - closet -type fixture. Include brass body with corrosion - resistant internal components, non - hold -open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome - plated finish on exposed parts. a. Internal Design: Diaphragm or piston operation. b. Style: Exposed. C. Inlet Size: NPS 1. d. Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, lever- handle actuator. e. Consumption: 1/8 gal. /flush for urinals; 1.28 gal. /flush for water closets. f. Tailpiece Size: NPS % for urinals, NPS 1 -1/2 for water closets and standard length to top of bowl. co 2.04 `� ° TOIL T SEATS ,. C7 A: ,� Tq��(ei :Seats: Lj _ur 1,,­1 °Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 9: a. Bemis Manufacturing Company. I t gib. Church Seats. ac. Kohler Co. d. Olsonite Corp. 2. Description: Toilet seat for water - closet -type fixture. a. Material: Molded, solid plastic with antimicrobial agent. b. Configuration: Open front without cover. C. Size: Elongated. d. Hinge Type: SC, self- sustaining, check. e. Class: Heavy -duty commercial. f. Color: White. 2.05 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Engineered Brass Co. b. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. d. Pro -Flo. e. TCI Products. f. TRUEBRO, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 -4 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and Cold- water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. 2.06 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Josam Company. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. > 7 5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. w::. C' rn B. Water - Closet Supports: ` X PP �_ 1. Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible and standard rr>�ing bight of wall- mounting, water - closet -type fixture. Include single or doubif. vertical or horizontal, hub - and - spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space. C. Urinal Supports: 1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall- mounting, urinal -type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Accessible- Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights. 2.07 WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. /Fiat Products. C. Eljer. d. Kohler Co. e. TOTO USA, Inc. 2. Description Accessible, wall- mounting, back - outlet, vitreous -china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. a. Style: Flushometer valve. 1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon jet design. 2) Design Consumption: 1.28 gal. /flush. 3) Color: White. b. Fixture Support: Water - closet support combination carrier. 2.08 URINALS A. Urinals: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 2.09 2. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. /Fiat Products. C. Eljer. d. Kohler Co. e. Peerless Pottery, Inc. f. TOTO USA, Inc. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Description Accessible, wall- mounting, bottom - outlet, vitreous -china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. a. Type: Washdown_ b. Strainer or Trapway: Open trapway. C. Design Consumption: 1 gal. /flush. d. Color: White. e. Supply Spud Size: NPS 3/4. f. Outlet Size: NPS 1 -1/2. g. Drain Piping: NPS 1 -1/2 chrome - plated, cast -brass P -trap; 0.045 -inch- thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. LAVATORIES A. Lavatories: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. co b. Barclay Products, Ltd. U1% < C. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. /Fiat Products. d. Eljer. e. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. f. Kohler Co. 17 g. Peerless Pottery, Inc. h. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. — w M i. TOTO USA, Inc. 2 ' Description: Accessible Counter - mounting, vitreous -china fixture. — a. Type: Self- rimming. b. Color: White. C. Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome - plated copper with stops. d. Drain: Grid with offset waste. e. Drain Piping: NPS 1 -1/4 by NPS 1 -1/2 chrome - plated, cast -brass P -trap; NPS 1- 1/2, 0.045 -inch- thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. 2.10 SERVICE BASINS A. Service Basins: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc.. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. /Fiat Products. C. Florestone Products Co., Inc d. Precast Terazzo Enterprises, Inc. e. Stern - Williams CO., Inch 2. Description: Flush -to -wall, floor mounting, precast terrazzo fixture with rim guard. a. Shape: Square b. Size: 24 x 24 inches C. Height: 12 inches d. Tiling Flange: On one side. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 -6 51 u 0 u G L n u n 0 0 H, h Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J e. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces. f. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Examine roughing -in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to- nanufarers' written instructions. 0 . r�� 'n B. Install off -floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall - mounting fixtures. 1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back - outlet fixtures. -- �, 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste pip: Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J L. Install toilet seats on water closets. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa M. Install faucet -spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. N. Install water - supply flow - control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. O. Install faucet flow - control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. P. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. Q. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep - pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." R. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one -part, mildew- resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." a_) 3.05x1 CC$INECTIONS 0mg installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate v_ Lut t J general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. BI. 064hect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent g. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. 3.047-.',, FIRD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. E. Install fresh batteries in sensor - operated mechanisms. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-8 51� F END OF SECTION 15410 IN r -..a 0 �9 01 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-9 it Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream. PW C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory- finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 15410 IN r -..a 0 �9 01 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-9 it Is'* Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15415 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following and related components: w) 1. Pressure water coolers. c -_ 2. Fixture supports. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Drinking Fountain or Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached ;�jd,:Used by people with disabilities. B. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking. C. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture. D. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated. E. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality - control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415-1 id E Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC All 17.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities "; Public Law 90 -480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101- 336, "Americans with Disabilities Act "; for fixtures for people with disabilities. C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -- Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self- Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking - Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for type and style classifications. E. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS A. Water Coolers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Halsey Taylor. C. Haws Corporation. d. Larco, Inc. � k < e. Oasis Corporation. f. Sunroc Corp. U Description: Accessible, ARI 1010, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, wall- mounting water ui cooler for adult- mounting height. a Cabinet: Bilevel, stainless - steel. b. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck. C. Control: Push bar. pv _ d. Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve. e. Drain(s): Grid with NPS 1 -1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap complying with c- ASME All 12.18.1. f. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air - cooled condensing unit, corrosion - resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion- resistant- metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat. 1) Capacity: 7.5 gph of 50 deg F cooled water from 80 deg F inlet water and 90 deg F ambient air temperature. g. Support: Type I, water cooler carrier. Refer to "Fixture Supports" Article. 2.02 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Josam Co. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415-2 5 im Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. �., 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. B. Description: ASME Al 12.6.1 M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported. 1. Type II: Bilevel, hanger -type carrier with three vertical uprights. 2. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of steel pipe uprights. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locatrgirs of piping -n connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping(,4144 types of . supports match those indicated. cr m B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. y a. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Use carrier off -floor supports for wall - mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use chrome - plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install off -floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall- mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Install water - supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system. Provide dielectric fitting in waste piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. ., F. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep - pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in trrr Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415-3 ft Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one -part, mildew- resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height. B. Adjust water cooler temperature settings. 3.07 CLEANING A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, 00 an¢ debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 00n fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. - -` END OF SECTION 15415 P , r 0 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415-4 e•, Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15738 SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes split- system air - conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator -fan and compressor- condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts. 1.03 SUBMITTALS -q s A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for-490h type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velbe s, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical charact" cs. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. > cam. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split- system air - conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split- system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Energy - Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." E. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC -free refrigerants. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS im 15738-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.06 WARRANTY Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split- system air - conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation. 2. First Co. 3. Lennox Industries Inc. 4. Mitsubishi Electric Sales Canada, Inc. 5. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division. 6. Mitsubishi Heavy Industries America, Inc.; Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Division, Inc. 7. Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp.. 8. Tadiran Electronic Industries Inc.; Appliance Division. r— 9. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group. 10. `r York International Corp. C102 Q ,2.02 c W6T L--MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR -FAN COMPONENTS _.J ; >= A. Cak7ir+et: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Archi6ct, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. B r s ReWri� rant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 21U /240, and with thermal- expansion valve. C. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan. D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. E. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 2.03 AIR - COOLED, COMPRESSOR - CONDENSER COMPONENTS A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current - sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1. Compressor Type: Scroll. 2. Refrigerant Charge: R -410A. SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15738-2 1 P Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low- temperature air cut -off thermostat. E. Fan: Aluminum - propeller type, directly connected to motor. F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal - overload protection. G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator tan, with the following features: 1. Compressor time delay. 7) y 2. 24 -hour time control of system stop and start. - 3. Liquid - crystal display indicating temperature, set -point temperature, � "4K seNng, .• operating mode, and fan speed. 0- 4. Fan -speed selection, including auto setting. J B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft - annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory clued, dKd, pressurized, and sealed; factory- insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends cr PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator -fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install compressor- condenser components on elastomeric mounts with a minimum static deflection of 1/4 inch. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick - connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." C. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15738-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field- assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.04 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15738 SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15738-4 1 P, r— v~3 SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15738-4 1 P, tilt Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15755 DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes factory- assembled and - tested, desiccant, refrigeration -type dehumidification units with the following operation and optional accessories and components: 1. Cooling package consisting of compressors, condenser coil, and evaporator coil. 2. Outside- and return -air dampers. 3. Energy- recovery heat exchangers. rv-J 4. Automatic controls.. a 5. Reactivation -air pretreatment heat exchanger. 1.03 SUBMITTALS �-- C- A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. "� i.'.1 B. Source quality - control test reports. > _rte C. Field quality - control test reports. 01 D. Startup report. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dehumidification units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of dehumidification units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section 'Roof Accessories." DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 15755-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.06 WARRANTY Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of dehumidification units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Chemical Desiccant Rotor: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified. 2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt -drive fan. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 a Dl��SICCANT DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS WITH ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL r t A. Dd4bription: Factory- assembled and - tested, desiccant dehumidification unit suitable for og400r installation. CµManufacturers: - ...a. Air Technology Systems, Inc. Bry-Air, Inc. Ce. Fresh Air Solutions. Governair Corporation. e. Kathabar Inc. f. Munters; Cargocaire Division. g. NovelAire Technologies. h. Octagon Air Systems. B. Casing: Double -wall construction, 20- gauge, with corrosion- protective coating and exterior enamel finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets, minimum 2 -inch- thick, glass -fiber insulation fill with no metal structure through the insulation, corrosion- resistant fasteners, knockouts for electrical and piping connections through the bottom of the unit within the roof curb, condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs. Provide access doors to permit unit servicing, with door handles and heavy duty hinges. C. Energy Recovery Wheel: Constructed of corrugated synthetic fibrous media, with a desiccant intimately bound and uniformly and permanently dispersed throughout the matrix structure of the media, to prevent delamination or erosion of the desiccant material over time. Provide synthetic media construction only to provide corrosion resistance and resistance against attack DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 15755-2 P11, 4" im Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa from laboratory chemicals present in pharmaceutical, hospital, etc. environments as well as attack from external outdoor air conditions. Face flatness of the wheel shall be maximized in order to minimize wear on inner seal surfaces and to minimize cross leakage. Rotor shall be constructed of alternating layers of flat and corrugated media. Wheel layers shall be uniform in construction forming uniform aperture sizes for air flow. Wheel construction shall be fluted or formed honeycomb geometry so as to eliminate internal wheel bypass, and construction shall not permit separation or spreading of wheel layers to prevent channeling and performance degradation. The media shall be in accordance with NFPA or UL guidelines. The wheel shall be ARIA 060 certified and carry the ARI certification stamp. 1. Desiccant Material: Desiccant material shall be a molecular sieve, and specifically a 4A or smaller molecular sieve to minimize cross contamination. 2. Wheel Media Support: Wheel frames shall consist of evenly spaced galvanized steel spokes, galvanized steel outer band and rigid center hub. The wheel construction should allow for post fabrication wheel alignment. 3. Wheel Seals: Wheel seals shall be a contact brush seal on both the periphery of the wheel and the face. Seals shall be easily adjustable. 4. Wheel Cassette: Cassette shall be fabricated of heavy duty reinforced galvanized steel or welded structural box tubing. Cassettes shall have a built in adjustable purge section minimizing cross contamination of supply air. Bearings shall be external flanged bearj,q s or pillow block. Drive systems shall consist of fractional horsepower A.C. drive mcrs with multilink drive belts. Cassette construction may be incorporated directl�6p ur t_in lieu of separate cassette. D. Desiccant Wheel: Wheels shall be constructed of corrugated synthetic media, with :a; desiccant intimately bound and uniformly and permanently dispersed throughout the matrix sfri�j ture�,pf the media, to prevent delamination or erosion of the desiccant material over tim { �,, rov' synthetic media construction only to provide corrosion resistance and resistance agd attaa from external outdoor air conditions. Face flatness of the wheel shall be maximized order_to minimize wear on inner seal surfaces and to prevent cross leakage. `'4 1. Desiccant Material: Desiccant material shall exhibit a type III isotherm to insure proper performance with low temperatures of regeneration. Lithium chloride, or lithium chloride containing desiccant shall not be used because of the deliquescent property of LiCL2 during the adsorption process. 2. Wheel Media Support: Wheel frames shall consist of evenly spaced galvanized steel spokes, aluminum outer band and rigid center hub. The wheel construction shall allow for post fabrication wheel alignment. 3. Wheel Seals: Wheel face seals shall be high temperature extruded contact seals which are easily adjustable, and which prevent leakage at up to 8" w.c. differential pressure. Face seal shall be Teflon coated to maximize wear resistance. Periphery seals shall be a contact brush seal which is easily adjustable. 4. Wheel Cassette: Cassettes shall be fabricated of heavy duty reinforced minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel. Bearings shall be inboard, zero maintenance, permanently sealed roller bearings or sealed pillar block bearings for larger wheels. Drive systems shall consist of fractional horsepower A.C. drive gear motors. The drive mechanism shall be either a heavy duty chain and sprocket drive assemblies or belt with tension device. Cassette construction may be incorporated directly into unit in lieu of separate cassette. E. Evaporator Coils: Evaporator coils shall be of a cross -flow air -to- refrigerant type that is constructed of a galvanized steel frame so that the airflow velocity is maintained below 450 feet per minute. The evaporator coils shall be 3 rows of copper tubes with one circuit per 6000 BTU /hr heat transfer at design, with aluminum fins with rippled edges and lanced surfaces. 1. Coils shall be tested to 600 psig. DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 6 N 15755-3 j� Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 2. Coil tubes shall be expanded at the tube collar. 3. Tubes shall be internally rifled to enhance heat transfer. F. Condenser Coil: Condenser coil shall be of a cross -flow air -to- refrigerant type that is constructed of a galvanized steel frame so that the airflow velocity is maintained to 500 feet per minute. The condenser coil shall have 4 rows of copper coils with 1 circuit per 8 tubes, with aluminum fins with rippled edges and lanced surfaces. 1. Coils shall be tested to 600 psig. 2. Coil tubes shall be expanded at the tube collar. 3. Tubes shall be internally rifled to enhance heat transfer. G. Refrigeration Package: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." 1. Compressors: Hermetic, scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators and crankcase heaters that de- energize during compressor operation; with thermal- expansion valves, filter- dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, and liquid- and suction -line service valves. a. Refrigerant Charge: R -410A. b. Capacity Control: 1) Cycle compressor. C. Low - Pressure Cutout: Manual reset after three auto -reset failures. d. High- Pressure Cutout: Manual reset. e. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset. -- f. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevent compressor restart for five minutes after shutdown. IM4ftk V !' ryh '••• _.. g. Adjustable, Low - Ambient, Head - Pressure Control: Designed to operate at temperatures as low as 0 deg F by cycling condenser fans and controlling speed of last fan of each circuit. r C) Supply and Exhaust Fans: Direct -drive centrifugal plenum fan with backward inclined vanes, dynamically and statically balanced. Fan wheel hub may be cast aluminum or steel as dictated by the application. Reactivation -Air Fan: Direct -drive centrifugal plenum fan with backward inclined vanes, dynamically and statically balanced. Fan wheel hub may be cast aluminum or steel as dictated by the application. J. Outside -Air Filters: 2 -inch- thick, throwaway filters in filter rack, with a minimum efficiency report value of 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 and 90 percent average arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1. K. Reactivation -Air Filters: 2 -inch- thick, throwaway filters in filter rack, with a minimum efficiency report value of 6 according to ASHRAE 52.2 and 90 percent average arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1. L. Drain Pan: Stainless steel, pitched to comply with ASHRAE 62 or a minimum of 1 inch to drain connection. Extend pan at least 4 inches beyond leaving air side of evaporator coil. M. Outside -Air Intake Dampers: Return- and outside -air intake dampers with damper operator and control package. DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 15755-4 1 fl MAW to Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 400 cfm per ton with 1 -inch wg pressure differential. 2. Damper Operator: 24 -V ac, close coupled, with spring return. N. Operating Controls: Factory- installed microprocessor shall control and monitor unit and accept enable /disable command from the building control system, and shall operate dehumidification components to maintain exhaust -air humidity set point. 1. Exhaust -air humidity and temperature sensors. 2. Control Outputs: Energy recovery wheel motor, cooling, and desicannt wheel motor. 3. Fan Speed Control: Vary supply, exhaust, and reactivation fan motor through unit - mounted variable frequency drives in response to dehumidification requirements. 2.03 ROOF CURBS A. Restrained vibration isolated roof curb shall be provided and installed in accordance with B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. B_ Install dehumidification units on vibration - control devices. Vibration- control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Connect condensate drain pans using minimum NPS 1 copper tubing. Extend to discharge onto roof membrane. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan. B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination in roof - mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate return -air duct through roof structure and insulate the space between roof and bottom of unit. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS W Irr 15755-5 Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls ". �a 2.04 MOTORS "? _.f A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." r y PART 3 - EXECUTION C - 3.01 EXAMINATION v A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. B_ Install dehumidification units on vibration - control devices. Vibration- control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Connect condensate drain pans using minimum NPS 1 copper tubing. Extend to discharge onto roof membrane. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan. B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination in roof - mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate return -air duct through roof structure and insulate the space between roof and bottom of unit. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS W Irr 15755-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4868. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field - assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning components and retest as specified above. 3.05 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Perform the following final checks before startup: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to r-- ducts and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal - overload protection V% is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. cr a r Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan N, •- wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. S.- U Verify lubrication of bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts. > 6_ .' Set outside- and return -air mixing dampers to minimum outside -air setting. ' ' - Install clean filters. 8. `_J Verify that manual and automatic volume control dampers in connected duct systems are ` in fully open position. C. Starting procedures for dehumidification units include the following: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace malfunctioning motors, bearings, and fan wheels. 2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance. D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for dehumidification unit testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Startup Report: Report findings during startup. Identify startup steps, corrective measures taken, and final results. DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 15755-6 i� Iw 4 �M III k Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean dehumidification units internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils' entering -air face. B. After completing system installation, testing, and startup service of dehumidification units, clean filter housings and install new filters. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain dehumidification units. Refer to Division 1 Section " Demonstration and Training." DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS END OF SECTION 15755 _ r• J �4 V 15755-7 e Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. METAL DUCTS 15815-1 iiw- milk 1.02 SUMMARY rr A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air - distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10 -inch wg. Metal ducts include the following: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. r� 2. Single -wall, round, and flat -oval spiral -seam ducts and formed fittings.. 3. Duct liner. ^ °, r B. Related Sections include the following: [n "Duct 1. Division 15 Section Accessories" for dampers, sound - control d, -dbct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. ;= o .. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air - moving and - distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: CAD - generated and drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts. p 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation, and seismic restraints. METAL DUCTS 15815-1 iiw- milk Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling- and wall- mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices. 4. Ceiling- mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality - control test reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to r, product selection: 4 1. < Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the i, manufacturers specified. C `.� 2.02": ,p,,,-ET METAL MATERIALS A.1 Coriiply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- -Metal and Flexible" for LL aice"ptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise iridi6ated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, - dish orations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock - forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have milt - phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. Ductwork that is exposed are required to be painted shall have paint -grip surface treatment. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.03 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant' is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open -weave fabric strips and mastics. METAL DUCTS 15815-2 *04 i 9 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. C. Flanged Joint Mastic: One -part, acid - curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all- thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc - chromate primer after installation. 2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- - Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. 3. Galvanized -steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces paired with zinc - chromate primer. 0 ? C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self- tapping metal screw compti ble with duct materials. r s ;5 cr M D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. Q 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless -steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless Materials 5re electrolytically separated from ducts. 2.05 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible." B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide -on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. C. Ward Industries, Inc. METAL DUCTS 15815-3 L Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Formed -On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2 -inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. 2.06 ROUND AND FLAT -OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION A. Diameter as applied to flat -oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat -oval duct. B. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock -Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible." C. Duct Joints: 1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center - beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. At the contractor's option on ducts up to 20 inches in diameter, flanged joints with barrel clamps and neoprene gaskets may r. be used. 2. Mound Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double - lipped, EPDM ubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's - -� =-tolerances. L€ .a. Manufacturers: �"�"p .0 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) Lindab Inc. E,,.,R. `' " _t. Alternative prefabricated connection system consisting of rolled- or fabricated - ' flanges, with barrel clamp and neoprene gasket. cam? 1) Manufacturers: a) Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. D. 90- Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal -seam straight ducts. E. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. F. Fabricate elbows using die - formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die - formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1 -1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: 1. Mitered -Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2 -inch wg: METAL DUCTS 15815-4 1 ..." AW m Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. 3. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die - formed elbows for 45- and 90- degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 4. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 5. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat -Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. 6. Die - Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch thick with 2 -piece welded construction. 7. Round Gored -Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non -elbow fittings specified above. 8. Flat -Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal -seam flat -oval duct specified above. 9. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10 -Inch wg: 0.022 inch. 3.02 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings. C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. METAL DUCTS 15815-5 to w., Irrw PART 3 - EXECUTION m.a 3.01 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static - Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, following: construct ducts acc4g the M % 1. Supply Ducts: 2 -inch wg. �- 2. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 -inch wg. w.. B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel. �.. % v 3.02 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings. C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. METAL DUCTS 15815-5 to w., Irrw Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police S Project No. 529430 -J k G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural a enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. 1. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in unless specifically indicated. J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke - control dampers, lig and similar finished work. K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, a to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transforme electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. M. Non - Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. N. Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealan smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestoppi VA and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through - Penetrat Syems." ,yo-tect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclo wo MACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." 3.03,x, 0RM AND JOINT SEALING A:; e duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction f Metal and Flexible ". 1. Seal all joints and seams to SMACNA Seal Class A. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. 3.04 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of e intersection. B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor. C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding (proof -test) load. D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. age Project a City, Iowa permanent d partitions ng layouts, d afterward vaults and and exterior id ducts or openings on ind exterior Fire and ig materials m Firestop ed. Follow branch of failure METAL DUCTS I 15815 - 6 mom r7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 3.05 CONNECTIONS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.06 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS A. Mark position of dampers and air - directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing. r-11 rj B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. „ 1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. 2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. i-- 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning pr s. C" C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris remov�1 3'rom'I/AC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other poirt�;'bf entl'g into building. > V D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air - handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return -air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum - collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. F. Cleanliness Verification: METAL DUCTS tiff0 0 15815-7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 2. Where contaminants are discovered, re -clean and reinspect ducts. END OF SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS 15815-8 r, ire < J METAL DUCTS 15815-8 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. Fire dampers. = 3. Duct - mounting access doors. (7) - -- 4. Flexible connectors. _1 0- 5. Flexible ducts. 6. Duct accessory hardware. 1.03 SUBMITTALS > v A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. Fire dampers. 3. Duct - mounting access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Flexible ducts. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Special fittings. 2. Manual- volume damper installations. 3. Fire - damper installations, including sleeves and duct - mounting access doors. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling- mounting items. Show ceiling- mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories. D. Field Quality Control Test Reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, 'Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." '^ DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-1 ON IN E Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock - forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill - phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. Duct surface shall have paint -grip finish for ducts requiring field painting. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M. D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1 -side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6. B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classes of 3 -Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-2 F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on r galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts. erBtods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch rnmimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. u "! P ,i2.03'1 VZiLEJME DAMPERS Air Balance, Inc. 2, American Warming and Ventilating. �... 3. a CESCO. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 6. METALAIRE, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 9. Ruskin Company. 10. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classes of 3 -Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-2 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Low- Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single - blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design as indicated, low- leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat - shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll- Formed Steel Blades: 0.064 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Aluminum Frames: Hat - shaped, 0.10 -inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 4. Roll- Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10 -inch- thick aluminum sheet. 5. Extruded - Aluminum Blades: 0.050 -inch- thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: Oil- impregnated bronze thrust or ball. 8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. D. Jackshaft: 1 -inch- diameter, galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe- bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple- damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple- damper assembly. E. Damper Hardware: Zinc - plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3624 inch= 'thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to ;suit damper -n operating -rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. -- 2.04 FIRE DAMPERS �- r °� ;t7 A. Manufacturers: a 1. Air Balance, Inc. > 2. Greenheck. `J 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 7. Prefco Products, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Vent Products Company, Inc. 10. Ward Industries, Inc. B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555. C. Fire Rating: 1 -1/2 hours. D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream, except for ducts up to 12 inches in height; fabricated with roll- formed, 0.034 -inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field - installed, galvanized sheet steel. FM DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J r Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Iowa City, Iowa 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick as indicated and of length to suit application. 2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements. F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. G. Blades: Roll- formed, interlocking, 0.034 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full - length, 0.034 -inch- thick, galvanized -steel blade connectors. H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless -steel closure spring. I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. 2.05 DUCT - MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1 -by -1 -inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. C. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. r. e. Greenheck. V_% f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc. I I -- i. Ward Industries, Inc. L .c, Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. 3 Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: Ll - ' 7 a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. G: Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1 -inch thickness. Include cam latches. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin -in notched frame. D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber. E. Insulation: 1 -inch- thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-4 1 3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa B. General Description: Flame- retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3 -1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2 -3/4 -inch- wide, 0.028 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf /inch in the warp and 360 Ibf /inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCTS .. A. Manufacturers: w. cr 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. r' M 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. -+ 0 7J 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation. "o B. Insulated -Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2 -ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg positive and 1.0 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size. 2.08 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. DUCT ACCESSORIES E 15820-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories ' in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths , from branch takeoff. E. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. ■ F. Install fire dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL- approved written instructions. G. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50 -foot spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. H. Install the following sizes for duct - mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. r� kr� Instill the following sizes for duct - mounting, round access doors: c, t FZ One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. Pr � Two -Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. .f� Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." LL K�' Istgll flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and riaotr^3rized equipment supported by vibration isolators. L ' Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60 -inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. N. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire dampers for proper action. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-6 1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Final positioning of manual - volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to NFPA 90A: 1. Fire damper: Remove fusible links and test for complete shutter closure. Replace link after testing. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-7 y w.1 C, ` �0 c� DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-7 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall- mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire dampers and volume- contro�.,d!!rnpef,5rnot integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. C. cr 1.03 SUBMITTALS - r- I D:- 3 ;u — (0 A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following: . - 7: .p 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting§details ;,and performance data including throw and drop, static - pressure drop, and noise ratings. era 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. Security Grille: 1. Manufacturers: a. A -J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. C. Carnes. d. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. e. Krueger. f. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. g. Price Industries. h. Titus. i. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES e 15855-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 4. Face Arrangement: 3/16 -inch- thick perforated faceplate with 5/16 -inch- diameter holes ' spaced 7/16 inch o.c., staggered at 60 degrees. 5. Wall Sleeve: 3/16 inch welded to face. 6. Mounting: 1 1/2 -by -1 1 /2- by- 3/16 -inch retaining angle frame. ' 7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed -blade assembly. B. Fixed Face Grille: 1. Manufacturers: a. A -J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. C. Carnes. d. Dayus Register & Grille. ' e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. f. Krueger. g. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. h. Price Industries. i. Titus. j. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Steel. , 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Arrangement: 1/2- by- 1/2- by -1/2 -inch grid core. 5. Frame: 1 -1/4 inches wide. 6. Mounting: As schedule. 7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed -blade assembly. C. Drum Louver Diffuser: r- 1. Manufacturers. < a. Carnes. 7 b. Krueger. k � c. Price. t g I _ ' d. Titus. ­0 ;' e. Tuttle & Bailey. 2 - -' Material: Extruded aluminum. , Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. f 4 Mounting: Surface. = 5. :: Pattern: Rotatable drum, individually adjustable vanes. ' 6. Dampers: Opposed blade. D. Spiral Duct Mounted Grille. 1. Manufacturers. a. Titus. b. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face arrangement: Single deflection. 5. Mounting frame: All aluminum with radius end caps to match duct diameters from 6 ' inches (152 mm) through 36 inches (914 mm) in even increments. 6. Mounting: Duct. 2.03 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS I DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855-2 1 n 0 0 e Howard R_ Green Company Project No. 529430 -J A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. b. Carnes. C. Krueger. d. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. e. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. f. Price Industries. g. Titus. h. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches or 12 by 12 inches. 5. Face Style: Three cone. 6. Mounting: T -bar or mounting panel. 7. Pattern: Fixed. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 0 - �, _ nn sue. A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling- Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855-3 4. €—t Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J END OF SECTION 15855 �,...; U. i 1 r DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 15855-4 e Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1 -GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory- wired controls. B. Related Sections include the following: _ ° 1. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements tha(4 e1ate to this Section. = 1.03 DEFINITIONS r� µ ' r CP1' A. DDC: Direct digital control. Q B. 1 /0: Input/output. v cac� C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control devices and networks. D. MS/TP: Master slave /token passing. E. PC: Personal computer. F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative. G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token - passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-1 C' Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project r Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product , indicated. 1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers /transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays /switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment. 2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third -party applications. 3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. 4. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Written description of sequence of operation. 5. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 6. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. -0 7. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, , diagrams, modems, and interconnections. DDC System Hardware: ', i =, a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. I (,:f b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. C. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, t+ showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation -; and control unit locations. 9._ Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, °= data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations. 10. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction. C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135. , D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following: HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-2 ' Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Field quality - control test reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step -by -step procedures indexed for Wch op-ator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recomrin- and-n calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. 0, r 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE ° O_ A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufactureesp autho;ized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system compoR�nts required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors im ;7. A. plans and room details before installation. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-3 t Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Tracer Summit, Trane Co, (The); North American Commercial Group. B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token - passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point- and -click graphics. 2.03 UNITARY CONTROLLERS ,eb Unitized, capable of stand -alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient 1/0 salacity for the application. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. ` Operating System: Manage 1/0 communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. f Perform scheduling with real -time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit. 4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 2.04 SMALL POINT CONTROLLERS A. Units: Modular in design and consisting of processor board with programmable non- volatile RAM (NOVRAM) memory, local operator access and display panel, and HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-4 , 10 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa integral interface equipment. Provide software and firmware specific for the required application. Controllers shall support free -form modular DDC programming, and intelligent temperature sensors for independent local control, and interface to the facility management system. 1. Intelligent temperature sensor support for local display, control, and override, minimum of 4 local or global points, and user defined passwords. 2. Integral 7 -day start/stop schedule. 3. Stand -alone logic sequences with object module programming. 4. Universal inputs to accept thermistor, voltage, current, and contact closures as valid input signals. 5. Relay or low voltage triac outputs to control floating actuators, two position actua- tors, on /off control, and pulse width modulation proportional control. 6. Analog outputs for 0 to 10 Vdc actuators. 7. Input point parameters for normal and narrow ranges, outdoor and indoor tem- perature ranges, and individual calibration. " "3 B. Battery Backup: For minimum of 72 hours for complete system including 4-AM without interruption, with automatic battery charger. -. i _n C. Provide the following functions: `-'= Ca C, 1. Mathematical: Absolute value, calculate, square root, power, snr� average, totalize. 2. Logic: OR, AND, compare negate. © -0 3. Fixed Formula: High and low select, span, rate, ramp, enthalpy, wet.Lbulb, dewpoint, relative humidity, humidity ratio, filter. � 4. Data Manipulation: Store, file and set. 5. Display Panel: Display adjust, override, time, day, date, year, alarm scan, override scan. 6. Control Routines: Proportional, integral, lead lag, hysteresis correction and incremental control, floating, two position, reset, and relay operation. 7. Energy Management: Duty cycling, load shed, optimal run time, holiday and daylight savings time correction. D. Provide self -test procedure for checking digital display and computer. Display advisories for maintenance, performance, or software problems. Identify variables as reliable or unreliable. Variables identified as unreliable will flash when displayed and calculation will use default. E. Indicate alarms and deviations. Alarm scan shows alarms and identification. Continue alarm indication until acknowledged and alarm condition is corrected. F. Provide two communication interface ports permitting communication between processor, process interface equipment, other processors, and central processing unit. 2.05 SMALL POINT CONTROLLER INTERFACE A. Serves as interface between the controller LAN and the small point controllers. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-5 j fir Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J L' Iowa City Police Storage Project r Iowa City, Iowa B. Provide display screen with liquid crystal display with the ability to view and control points. From the display unit, an operator with an authorized password shall be able to obtain point status, command a point to change state, place points in "test" or "manual ", view and acknowledge alarms, change setpoints, and edit local controller parameters. The operator shall also be able to override time schedules, edit time schedules, establish special day schedules, and set alarm limits. 2.06 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS A. Shall have all features listed above for small point controllers. B. ASC's shall have "canned programmed sequences for complete out -of -the box installation, configuration, and commissioning. C. Connect to the controller LAN via a small point controller interface. No more than 64 application specific controllers (ASC) shall be connected to any single small point controller interface. D. Small point controller interface shall provide common and memory intensive functions for locally connected ASC's, including time scheduling, custom or global calculations, and historic data collection. The operator interface of the small point controller interface shall be used for database entry, and application programs shall be fully integrated and consistent with other LAN control units. E. Application Specific Controllers shall be utilized for zone or terminal equipment only. _�D Applications include rooftop units, make -up air handling units, exhaust fans, and VAV V; boxes. F Ak's shall function stand -alone for the local loop functions of the terminal unit. �b plete PID algorithms or fuzzy logic shall reside and execute at the ASC level. -,�'' 2.07 . ELECTRONIC SENSORS L.;' X 64 ription: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as r required. B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. IES; a Kele Company. C. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. Precon; a Kele Company. e. RDF Corporation. 2. Linear response, suitable for the working range of the application. 3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point including drift. 4. Repeatability plus or minus 0.5 °F. 5. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-6 1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 6. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Mounted in back box. Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 7. Averaging Elements in Ducts: Length as required to provide complete duct cross - sectional area coverage in accordance with manufacturers requirements. Use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft. 8. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless -steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2 -1/2 inches. Separable brass well. 9. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, insect - proof, dust resistant, and shielded from direct sunlight. P^ C. Intelligent sensors: j„ 1. Provide intelligent space sensors for Application Specific Controllers with the following features: a. 3 digit (plus decimal) alphanumeric display b. Ability to locally control analog or digital points on the connected controller C. Local override and setpoint adjustment (within software limits) d. Occupancy status indicator and ON /Off pushbutton e. Display of all local input and output points in the service mode for the Application Specific Controller f. Display of up to 4 user defined "global' or system points, i.e__outsideTir ?> temperature, outside air RH, and fan status. g. Password protection for access to the service mode. " D. RTDs and Transmitters: r 1. Manufacturers: M a. BEC Controls Corporation. O b. IES; a Kele Company. %� -9 C. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. Precon; a Kele Company. e. RDF Corporation. 2. Linear response, suitable for the working range of the application. 3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point, including drift. 4. 5. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Mounted in back box. Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. r 6. Averaging Elements in Ducts: Length as required to provide complete duct cross- sectional area coverage in accordance with manufacturers requirements; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. 7. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2- 1/2 inches. Separable brass well. 8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, insect - proof, dust resistant, and shielded from direct sunlight. 7" 6 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-7 t"* [�J Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa E. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element. 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. C. HyCal Sensing Products. d. MAMAC Systems, Inc. e. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. f. TCS /Basys Controls. g. Vaisala. 2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output. 3. Space relative humidity sensors: a. Operating range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. b. Accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent in the operational range of 20 to 95 percent RH. C. Hysteresis shall be less than 1 percent, sensitivity shall be 0.4 percent RH, and repeatability shall be 0.5 percent. d. Temperature compensated with less than 0.06 percent RH per °F. e. Surface mounting on single gang electrical outlet box. F. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. C. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. e. TCS /Basys Controls. f. Vaisala. y == Static - Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with ranges not exceeding 150 percent of maximum expected input. K a. Temperature compensated with typical thermal error or 0.06 percent of full scale in temperature range of 40 to 100 degrees F. b. Accuracy: 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.3 percent. c c. Output: 4 to 20 mA, 0 — 5 Vdc, or 0 — 10 Vdc, with input power from 12 to �- 28 Vdc. d. Building Static - Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25 -inch wg. e. Duct Static - Pressure Range: 0- to 5 -inch wg. 3. Differential- Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot -duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 4. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 2.08 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential - pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 10 -inch wg. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-8 M fir Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential - pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable pressure - differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump. C. Alternate Status Inputs for Fans and Pumps: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current - sensing fixed- or split -core transformers with self - powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. D. Current Switches: Self- powered, solid -state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. E. Electronic Valve /Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10 -V dc, feedback signal. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS SENSORS A. Filter gages: 1. r­> Magnehelic filter gages, range 0 to 3.5 inches w.g. 0.10 inch minorD-dimenfn, adjustable signal flag. 2. Snubber valves on high and low pressure ports to dampers pressure waves. 2.10 ACTUATORS °E M C r- M A. Electronic Actuators: Direct - coupled type designed for minimum 60,006191-s4c e cycles at rated torque. 1. Manufacturers: „0 a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. b. Johnson Controls, Inc. C. Honeywell Controls. 2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Coupling: V -bolt and V- shaped, toothed cradle. 4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation - sensing circuitry. 5. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring- return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring- return actuators. 6. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 -V ac or 8 W at 24 -V dc. 7. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10 -V do or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10 -V do position feedback signal. 8. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 9. Run Time: 30 seconds, maximum. 2.11 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Belimo Aircontrols (USA) Inc. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 3. Erie Controls. !"" HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-9 it e Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project r Iowa City, Iowa 4. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 5. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 6. Neles- Jamesbury. 7. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 8. Pneuline Controls. 9. Sauter Controls Corporation. B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. C. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics. 2.12 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and fiber -optic cables for control wiring: As required by control system and component manufacturers. Use plenum rated cable where exposed. 2.13 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. System Format: 1. Divide points of control or monitoring by system. 2.f'` Identify points with unique, structured point identifier reflecting "specific area" or c'' specific system", and "specified point". L121 B r pOt Process: r, Select, from menu, one of four general types of commands based upon password clearance, command points, information points, build parameters, and modify parameters. Commands not available by password clearance shall be deleted from video display. 2. Enter memory changes through keyboard. 3. Select entry modes, Aid or Direct, based on operator's degree of capability and familiarity with system. 4. Aid Mode shall prompt operator through each step indicating available options. 5. Direct Mode shall allow experienced operator to input command string directly. 6. Enter commands as alpha /numeric character strings. Where commands require data for limits, setpoint, and time, enter value in same engineering units as controlled variable. 7. Operator input shall not inhibit alarm reporting. Echo input on associated output device, to either execute or abort. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-10 , 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Operator Access Control: Restrict any operator commands through use of software password. D. Information Access: Obtain point status information from any designated output device with access command. Point status consists of point identification, numerical value (analog points) and associated engineering units, and individual function label indicating that point is on or off or in Alarm Normal condition. Output includes date and time of execution. E. Point Display: Video display includes status of single point or group of points with high and low limits (if applicable). Refresh display at least every 20 seconds. F. Alarm summary includes status of points in Alarm condition., G. Off - normal summary includes status of points in Off - Normal condition.? - c� H. Alarm Reporting: 1. Alarm outputs contain descriptor, point identification, point data, gj&eenng units, and date and time. : 7 `9 2. Print on line changeable message, up to 60 characters in length, for each al point specified, immediately. 3. Display alarm reports on video. Display multiple alarms in order of occurrence. 4. Inhibit reporting of associated analog and binary alarms upon HVAC system shutdown. Upon restart, inhibit alarm reporting for operator pre- determined time. 5. Operator specifies if alarm required acknowledgment. Advisories: 1. Lockout summary which contains status of points in locked out condition. 2. Continuously interrogate system hardware and programmable control units for failure or tampering and report if operational or not operational. 3. Power failure detection, time and date. 4. System communication failure with operator device, field interface unit, point, programmable control unit. J. Data Base Save /Restore: k 1. Provide program which allows saving or restoring of operating data. 2. Floppy disk or tape drive unit shall save or restore system operating data. 3. Data includes: a. Analog limits and differentials b. Start-stop times C. Access /secure times d. Lockout/unlock times e. Setpoint values and adjustment times f. Limits and differential values g. Totalization points, limits, and current values h. Alarm messages and their assignments i. Load control program operational parameters HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-11 M 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa HVAC control program operational parameters K. Power Failure Motor Restart: Provide program to restore systems to normal operating conditions following power outage, and to enforce emergency operating conditions during power outage. Automatically restart loads to correct operating condition if normal or emergency power is available. Stagger startup of rooftop units to avoid high inrush currents. 2.14 BASIC OPERATING FEATURES A. Binary (Digital) Capabilities: 1. Monitor binary (digital) sensors, continuously storing present contact condition in memory. 2. Indicate if point is off - normal, in alarm, or off- line. 3. Program output points for Open /Closed, Test/Reset, Start/Stop. 4. Feedback Start/Stop points. Employ point unique, feedback delay timer to temporarily suppress alarm reporting after input to allow time for response. 5. Output advisory message if response is not as commanded. 6. Hold points in present operating condition if controls power failure occurs. B. Analog Capabilities: 1. Measure, transduce, transmit and display analog values. Ln 2. <Express analog point values in proper engineering units, displaying with up to �r :seven significant digits. 3.�11� 0Have sensor to readout accuracy of plus or minus one degree F. L 4_j >=Use English system of measurement. 5.0 ". "Provide for operator designated ranges either linear, series of linear i approximations, split ranges, or square root extractions of exponential functions. 6. -, Compare analog read to high and low limits and annunciate Alarm or Off - Normal ocondition. :a 7. `Output alarm, including point identification current value and associated engineering units, high or low value, and time and date. 8. Automatically disable alarm reporting upon associated system shutdown. Allow sufficient time to return to normal operating conditions before allowing alarm reporting. 9. Provide limit and differential summary. C. Analog Point Adjust: 1. Remotely adjust controller set points or dampers. Automatically adjust points based upon preselected time or value. 2. Employ feedback so that if point fails to respond, responds with wrong value, or drifts from set point value by plus or minus 2 percent, output alarm message. Employ feedback delay timer to temporarily suppress alarm reporting after input to allow time for response. 3. Hold points in present operating condition if controls power failure occurs. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-12 d Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa D. Automatic Alarm Lockout: Automatically inhibit alarm reporting of analog and binary points upon associated system shutdown. Inhibit reporting for operator predetermined time, upon restart of HVAC systems. 2.15 HVAC CONTROL PROGRAMS 0 A. General: 1. Support English units of measurement. 2. Identify each HVAC Control system. w 2.16 PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FEATURES r` r == C,_ rn rn A. Alarm Messages: 1. Allow definition of minimum of 32 messages, each having minimum length d't64 �•• characters for each individual message. 2. Assign alarm messages to system messages including point's alarm condition, point's off - normal condition, totalized point's warning limit, hardware elements 3. advisories. Output assigned alarm with "message requiring acknowledgement ". 4. Operator commands include define, modify, or delete; output summary listing current alarms and assignments; output summary defining assigned points. + B. Weekly Scheduling: 1. Automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based on preselected time schedule for points specified. r 2. Provide program times for each day of week, per point, with one minute resolution. 3. Automatically generate alarm output for points not responding to command. 4. Provide for holidays, minimum of 366 consecutive holidays. 5. Operator commands: a. System logs and summaries. b. Start of stop point. C. Lock or unlock control or alarm input. d. Add, delete, or modify analog limits and differentials. e. Adjust point operating position. f. Change point operational mode. g. Open or close point. h. Enable /disable, lock/unlock, or execute interlock sequence or computation profile. i. Access or secure point. j. Begin or end HVAC control system. k. Modify load parameter. I. Modify demand limiting and duty cycle targets. 6. Output summary: Listing of programmed function points, associated program times, and respective day of week programmed points by software groups or time of day. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-13 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Interlocking: 1. Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one or more associated master points. 2. Binary contact, high /low limit of analog point or computed point shall be capable of being utilized as master. Same master may monitor or command multiple slaves. 3. Operator commands: a. Define single master /multiple master interlock process. b. Define logic interlock process. C. Lock/unlock program. d. Enable /disable interlock process. e. Execute terminate interlock process. f. Request interlock type summary. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. B. Verify that duct -, pipe -, and equipment- mounted devices and wiring are installed before proceeding with installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. c,, InsiaR.software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of _ pragrins to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. B. .o Coni>!ect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. f.« C.'Verify`'location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with w: DrawH:kgs and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches above the C'..: floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. D. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." E. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section " Hydronic Piping." F. Install electronic and fiber -optic cables according to Division 16. Plenum rated cable may be installed above lay -in ceilings without raceways, use conduit stub -ups through wall for wall- mounted devices to wall boxes. Application specific controllers for terminal units shall be factory mounted in the terminal units. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS Li 15900-14 1 F111 e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." C. Install signal and communication cable according to control system manufacturer's requirements. 1. Install exposed and concealed cable in raceway. w 2. Plenum rated cable is acceptable for installation above ceilings, use cofi -duit stub- , ups and boxes for device installation in walls. 3. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of S i 0 ca les where several cables follow a common path. .< r-. M 4. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge sib%; prWct against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 5. Number -code or color -code conductors for future identification anf service. of control system, except local individual room control cables. Z 6. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Provide relays, power supplies, inverters, etc., to yield a fully functional and operational control system meeting the required sequence of operation. E. Connect manual -reset limit controls independent of manual - control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. F. Connect hand - off -auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field - assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 4. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 5. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-15 6d 0 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 6. Test software and hardware interlocks. C Iowa City Police Storage Project i Iowa City, Iowa C. DDC Verification: 1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self - contained pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 8. Check DDC system as follows: a. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. b. Verify that spare 1/0 capacity has been provided. C. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 3.05 ADJUSTING A0 Calibrating and Adjusting: 1. < Calibrate instruments. rrr 2`: Make three -point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog . -- instrument. 3_s >- Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. ° --' 4:-, Control System Inputs and Outputs: o a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. C. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision- resistant source. 5. Pressure: a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. 6. Temperature: a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision- resistance source. b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-16 1 1� e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa j 7. Stroke and adjust control valves without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 8. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 9. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures. B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to provide training to Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 15900 �Y a n r_ '71 a i C, , EEw +a i"\ V HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-17 5 .., iw Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for conto ,,equi ment and devices and for submittal requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS r cr ni A. DDC: Direct digital control. �a 1.04 DEHUMIDFIER UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE > ; A. Start and Stop Dehumidification Unit: 1. Initiate: Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output to unit controller. C. Action: Energize supply and exhaust fans. Unit shall operate continuously. 2. Display: a. Enable /disable command. b. Enable /disable status. C. Supply -fan on -off indication. d. Exhaust -fan on -off indication. B. Ventilation, Dehumidification, Energy Recovery: 1. Initiate: DDC system time schedule. a. Unit controller shall monitor exhaust air temperature and relative humidity for control of the internal components, including energy recovery wheel, refrigeration circuit, and desiccant wheel operation to maintain return air relative humidity level of 48 percent, adjustable. b. Input Device: DDC system space temperature and relative humidity sensors. 2. Display: a. Exhaust air temperature. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 0 15940-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J b. Exhaust air relative humidity. C. Energy recovery wheel on -off indication. d. Refrigeration circuit on -off indication. e. Desiccant wheel on -off indication. f. Space temperature indication. g. Space relative humidity indication. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Preheat Coil: 1. Freeze Protection: a. Input Device: Exterior wall- mounted electronic temperature sensor. b. Input Device: Duct - mounted averaging element thermostat, located after heating coil. C. Output Device: Binary output to coil circulation pump motor starter. d. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm. e. Action: Start coil circulation pump when outside air temperatures are colder than 37 deg F. f. Action: Shut -down unit if leaving air temperature from the preheat coil is colder than 35 deg F. 2. Discharge -Air Temperature: a. Input Device: Electronic duct - mounted temperature sensor located after the coil. b. Output Device: DDC system output to electronic control valve. C. Action: Modulate control valve to maintain air temperature set point of 55 deg F. ,.0 3. Display: :5a. Preheat -coil air - temperature indication. �° =m c93. Preheat -coil air - temperature set point. CLI "o. Preheat -coil pump operation indication. I= ' °tl. Preheat -coil control -valve position. Freezestat - initiated alarm. FIE D. ` = FiIQrq: During occupied periods, when fan is running, differential air- pressure trangffiifters exist. 1. Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: DDC system output. C. Action: Enable control. 2. Differential Pressure: a. Input Device: Differential - pressure switches. b. Output Device: DDC system alarm. C. Action: Signal alarm on low- and high - pressure conditions. 3. Display: a. Filter air - pressure -drop indication. b. Filter high- air - pressure set point. PJ L� SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940-2 1 L7 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display A. Split- System: 1. Independent room temperature remote control device shall start and stop the unit to maintain space temperature of 75 deg F during cooling, and 70 deg F during heating. B. Heating Coils, Hydronic: 1. Room Temperature: a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. b. Input Device: Boiler system operational status. C. Output Device: Electronic control -valve operators. d. Action: Modulate valve to maintain temperature of 65 deg F. If boilers are not running, valve shall be disabled to minimize valve actuator operation and valve seat wear. 2. Display: a. Room temperature indication. b. Room temperature set point. C. Control -valve position. 1.06 POINTS LIST A. A points list follows this Section. Provide all necessary equipment and programming required to accomplish this sequence of operation as well as any additional work implied in the points list. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION iirtr 15940-3 terminal: • 1. DDC system graphic. 2. DDC system on -off indication. 3. DDC system occupied /unoccupied mode. rn 4. Outdoor - air - temperature indication. 5. Supply -fan on -off indication. 6. Exhaust -fan on -off indication. 7. Refrigeration circuit on -off indication. 8. Energy recovery wheel on -off indication. 9. Desiccant wheel on -off indication. 10. Filter air - pressure -drop indication. 11. Filter high- air - pressure set point. trr 12. Preheat -coil pump operation indication. 13. Preheat -coil control -valve position. !* 14. Exhaust air temperature indication. 15. Exhaust air relative humidity indication. 16. Space temperature indication. 17. Space relative humidity indication. 18. Space relative humidity set point. 1.05 TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE A. Split- System: 1. Independent room temperature remote control device shall start and stop the unit to maintain space temperature of 75 deg F during cooling, and 70 deg F during heating. B. Heating Coils, Hydronic: 1. Room Temperature: a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. b. Input Device: Boiler system operational status. C. Output Device: Electronic control -valve operators. d. Action: Modulate valve to maintain temperature of 65 deg F. If boilers are not running, valve shall be disabled to minimize valve actuator operation and valve seat wear. 2. Display: a. Room temperature indication. b. Room temperature set point. C. Control -valve position. 1.06 POINTS LIST A. A points list follows this Section. Provide all necessary equipment and programming required to accomplish this sequence of operation as well as any additional work implied in the points list. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION iirtr 15940-3 rn .` .,o p � A. Split- System: 1. Independent room temperature remote control device shall start and stop the unit to maintain space temperature of 75 deg F during cooling, and 70 deg F during heating. B. Heating Coils, Hydronic: 1. Room Temperature: a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. b. Input Device: Boiler system operational status. C. Output Device: Electronic control -valve operators. d. Action: Modulate valve to maintain temperature of 65 deg F. If boilers are not running, valve shall be disabled to minimize valve actuator operation and valve seat wear. 2. Display: a. Room temperature indication. b. Room temperature set point. C. Control -valve position. 1.06 POINTS LIST A. A points list follows this Section. Provide all necessary equipment and programming required to accomplish this sequence of operation as well as any additional work implied in the points list. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION iirtr 15940-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940-4 I LI-, < _: 0 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940-4 I a� } "W L I Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J POINTS LIST ICPD Evidence Storage Iowa City, Iowa Section 15940 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DIGITAL (BINARY) ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS u- O ZO Q r N (n F F fn LL Q F V) O LL LL(L w O J Z w m a Q m ¢ z W wl W, O �' p f., Wi Z a ml o:l w Q (W'i aa Wi a f F J O j O S fn FF- O 3I O J LL Y W K w �. = U D ' 0 Q Z a W 0 O Q¢ = c7 = t7 p 3 O J Q Z _ ra OI d w > J W F- Q _J Q LL co W V1 J p J LL J W = w ? Z ~ ] W ai W O R' w >? W (.1 (n Z W 2 of Lu W w DEHUM -1 X X1 X X X Outdoor Air X, X i Exhaust Fan X X Supply Fan —— X X Exhaust Air X X Energy Wheel X — Refrigeration Circuit X _ -- Desiccant Wheel X Filter i X X Space X X Preheat Coil Pump X X X X X Preheat Coil Valve X X X Preheat Coil DAT X tt X X Safeties j Freezestat X X X Reheat Coils (ea) Reheat coil valve X ! X X X Boiler Status X Section 15940 Page 1 of 1 - t f CT, y M �rJ Page 1 of 1 0" Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Constant - volume air systems. 2. Hydronic Piping Systems: j a. Constant -flow systems., -< b. Variable -flow systems. .7 3. HVAC equipment quantitative - performance settings. r it x - 4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. - -- 0 5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. ;K a 1.03 DEFINITIONS '} C) A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities. C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. E. NC: Noise criteria. F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. G. RC: Room criteria. H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. 1. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-1 Hi� Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. O. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Al TAR Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. TAI- Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB !*ptegies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the W-1 ,,0 pieipation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service .,.� representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' =J. advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1 r.: Agenda ltems: Include at least the following: c`= a. Submittal distribution requirements. Y b. The Contract Documents examination report. C. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project -site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-2 1 ir+ Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 0 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems'; or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems'; or TAB firm's forms approved by Architect. E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. r 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building duri �ntir(�,TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts %%i Owner's M operations. rn zl; C3 1.07 COORDINATION n > a_n co A. Coordinate the efforts of factory- authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine reviewed submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-3 O. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: , 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and ' variable- air - volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two -way valves and three -way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-4 1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems —Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. D. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. E. Examine system and equipment test reports. F. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. G. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. H. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. ' Fo Exrine terminal units, such as variable- air - volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible an<heir controls are connected and functioning. aMine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. "? K—'11 Exatpine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing flpid* flows. L, _ Eza6ne heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. ' M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. O. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: , 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and ' variable- air - volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two -way valves and three -way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-4 1 4" im Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. +* P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the fwing: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. a 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. : _. 0, 3. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational. `rte 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. �..i C s 0- 5. Balance and fire dampers are open. < r. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operations,, 7i 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air - pattern adjustments at%�requi an access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system op'e'ration'n be met. 3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and jj balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper - control positions, valve position indicators, fan- speed- control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts. PM TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-5 F Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. D. Check airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H. Check for airflow blockages. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. Check for proper sealing of air - handling unit components. K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.05 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT - VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. .o C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as L' " ez possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. 6, Z1,: d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum �` -- that houses the fan. that an air - handling unit, Measure static pressure across each component makes up .> -o :. -? r, rooftop unit, and other air - handling and - treating equipment. w -% a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel W' must change filters. : Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. — 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed changes. 6. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan - motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-6 1 L-..J 7 r" hill Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct - reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified toleranc6 of inCgated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations pres*ritied by the Contract Documents. '. a y. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. r; ....k C, 3.06 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS `` �� M m A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting Opump Mend of system. Check the sum of branch - circuit flows against approved pump flow>ate. i arect variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup- water - station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow - control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential - pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.07 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. B. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow - indicating device. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING IN 0 15950-7 LI Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. 3.08 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three -way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat - exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.09 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS L% During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic v te*erature- control system. easure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive 1 JFW -hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature °`" -o �kftjbgs. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. f.p e.5 &Te6'sure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.11.'- TEMPERATURE- CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low- temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 16950-8 11 +fir Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. Check main control supply -air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail -safe operations. 3.12 TOLERANCES _ r_> A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: F) 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to ply 1­0 percent. a. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. c r 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. "` j 3.13 FINAL REPORT tD A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter - quality font, on standard knd paper, in three -ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced syst'd'ms. '" 0 B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do -not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-9 1111111111 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside -, return -, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. F. Dehumidifier Unit Test Reports: For dehumidifying units with energy and desiccant wheels, G. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING L', 15950-10 1 include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. < C. Make and type. `; d. Model number and unit size. �Y 0 e. Manufacturer's serial number. ! ~ f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. i h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches. j Number of belts, make, and size. o k. Number of filters, type, and size. 2. — Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static - pressure differential in inches wg. f. Cooling coil static - pressure differential in inches wg. g. Outside airflow in cfm. h. Outside -air damper position. G. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING L', 15950-10 1 7 �.r iM Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. C. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering -water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving -water temperature in deg F. H. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: representing the duct cross - section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air - handling unit number. b. Location and zone. C. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. Include a diagram with a grid I. System -Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: D System and air - handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. ...»� `..e C" 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): j'7 i Airflow rate in cfm. b. 0: C. Leaving -water temperature in deg F. d. > + e. Entering -air temperature in deg F. C) TESTING, ADJUSTING, Include a diagram with a grid I. System -Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 0 15950-11 1. Unit Data: a. System and air - handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering -water temperature in deg F. C. Leaving -water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering -air temperature in deg F. 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING f: iw 0 15950-11 I L *, .- r.. 4,L Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa f. Leaving -air temperature in deg F. END OF SECTION 15950 4n i� tw. C, :act t! 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-12 l7 d. o Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 16010 C7 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL W--, c) 1.01 SUMMARY ©7 A. Section Includes 1. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Section, in addition to General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements. 2. The general provisions of this section apply to the other Division 16 sections where applicable. 3. The work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division and as called for on the Electrical Drawings, to include: supervision, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, startup and tests for the complete electrical installation. 4. Drawings for the work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of the work. Because of the scale of the Drawings, certain basic items such as connectors, fittings, access panels, pullboxes, etc. may not be shown. Where such items are required for proper installation of the Work, such items shall be included. 5. Equipment specification may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 6. Where noted on the Drawings or where called for in other sections of the specification, the Contractor for this division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make required connections. Contractor shall verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. 1.02 WORK BY OTHERS A. The Owner may award contracts which will run concurrent to the work. 1. See notes on plans for extent of Division 16 participation. 1.03 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner shall be as noted on plans. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period and coordinate electrical schedule and operations with Owner. f BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 60, 4 16010-1 F-I Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.05 FUTURE WORK A. Provide for future work as noted on plans. 1.06 ALLOWANCES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Cash Allowance: Refer to other sections and plans for allowance sum applicable to Work (if any). B. Allowance includes purchase, delivery and installation and is to be included as part of the Contract Price. 1.07 UNIT PRICES A. See other Sections for unit prices if required. 1.08 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner - Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. `G. S�edule of Alternates: C,1 C) See plans, other Divisions and Bid Form for alternates. uu P —1 1.og - A6TIVE SERVICES n_xtsting active services: water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be �Oii cted against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which aQ to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the Utility or Municipality having jurisdiction. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data for electrical equipment shall consist of shop drawings and /or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment, to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance curves, ratings, control sequence and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. Shop drawings shall be submitted on all equipment and materials. B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in all Sections. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 an Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa Pft iw D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Prior to submittal of Products List and Shop Drawings, this Contractor shall check and mark "approved" and sign all copies. Submittals will not be accepted from Suppliers or Manufacturers. F. The Engineer will check shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and will in so doing assume that the shop drawings conform to all specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawing by the Engineer doq§ not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with all ele6ents pg the specification. 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS NOTE: ni O -o Contractor to refer to those codes and standards that pertain to this section of the sp5ifcatig. All codes and standards may or may not be listed, but it shall be the Contractor's responsibility t=efer to latest editions of such and coordinate related work as necessary. A. Imposed Standards /Regulations 1. General: Applicable provisions of the following codes and standards are hereby imposed on a general basis for the electrical work (in addition to specific applications specified by individual work sections of these specifications) and in addition to applicable local and state codes. Underwriters Laboratories American Gas Association AWS Standards for Welding National Electric Code Local and /or State Electrical, Mechanical and Building codes International Building Code NFPA Standards and Pamphlets on 2. Every installation shall comply with applicable sections of every other specification. Changes required to conform shall be made without increase in contract price, after approval by Engineer in writing. "" BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-3 R Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa If changes are required to obtain above approvals, contractor shall submit them to Engineer for approval, after which revised data shall be submitted and written approval obtained. Changes shall be made without increase in contract price. 3. Installations must be entirely safe in every respect, and must not create any condition of any kind which will be harmful to any occupant of building, to operating personnel, to installation personnel, to testing personnel, to workmen, and to public; contractor for each installation shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will meet these conditions. If contractor believes that installation will not be safe for all parties, he shall so report in writing to the Engineer before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving his exact recommendations. 4. Manufacturer of each type of equipment used by itself or as a part of any system shall carefully check capacities, arrangements, and methods shown or specified (including space requirements, servicing requirements, ambient air temperatures, etc.) for installation of his equipment, and all connections to other system or to parts of same system to assure himself that when used, connected, interconnected, piped, wired, or controlled as specified, it can be properly serviced. If the manufacturer has any reservations in this regard, he shall state his reservations and /or suggested changes in a separate letter addressed to the Engineer and shall include this letter as a part of his shop drawing submission. 5. Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract prices where such adjustments are warranted. No adjustments in contract price will be allowed for additions required by applicable code, ordinance, statute, utility regulation, or labor regulation. It is the obligation of each contractor to include such items in his original bid. Changes in equipment shall be incorporated in shop drawings. cn If contractor fails to call such reservations or suggestions to Engineer's attention, in a` =' Cj writing, before any work is done or equipment is purchased, it will be assumed that he accepts his responsibility for providing a completely safe and completely coordinated installation. If at a later date changes become necessary to assure a completely safe and coordinated installation, they shall be made, as approved by Engineer, without increase in contract price. Vim$. Pe,,,'rmits and Tests, Electrical Work: The Electrical Contractor shall obtain and pay for all fees, permits and licenses required by his work, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual description preceding these electrical specifications. Submit a record copy (for Owner's records) of electrical work notices, permits, licenses, inspection or test reports, and similar items obtained in response to governing and imposed regulations and standards. 1.12 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Inspect site prior to bidding to be thoroughly familiar with existing conditions. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-4 1 L", +.w 0 .m j Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa aq B. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. C. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Engineer before proceeding. 1.13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING p A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of other Sections as applicab+e.= B. Work shall be installed and rough -in completed in cooperation with other (Oriract s to 9 assure completion when scheduled. FD 1.14 OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING > c� A. General Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure as required for the installation of the Electrical Work. B. This Contractor shall furnish to the General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings, but this shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional patching is required due to this Contractor's failure to inspect this work, then this Contractor shall make arrangements for the patching required to properly close the openings, to include patch painting, and this Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. C. When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to this Contractor's failure to install conduit wiring or equipment on schedule, or due to this Contractor's failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for the leaving of openings, then it shall �•* be this Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements for this cutting and patching and this Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in the correction. 1.15 CONCRETE WORK A. Concrete bases and pads for electrical equipment will be furnished by this Contractor. This contractor shall coordinate size and location. B. This contractor shall furnish equipment anchor bolts and shall be responsible for their proper installation and accurate location. 1.16 WIRING FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. This contractor will provide power services for motors and equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor to include safety disconnect switches and final connections. B. This Contractor will be responsible for internal wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring and interlock wiring for equipment furnished by him and by others as shown on plans. Wiring for the temperature control system is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-5 it 4 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. This Contractor will furnish motor starters for motors furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, except where other Sections call for starters to be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. Adjustable speed drives are to be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, and installed by the Electrical Contractor. D. This Contractor shall review the Electrical Drawings and shall call to the attention of the Engineer, prior to bidding, omissions of electrical services required for this equipment. 1.17 PROTECTION A. Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished by this Contractor. Equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc. until the project is completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc. shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. B. Protection of equipment during the plastering and painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Contractor performing that work, but this shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. C. Where the installation or connection of equipment requires this Contractor to work in areas previously finished by other contractors, this Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. This Contractor shall arrange with the other contractors for repairing and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged. q When heavy materials must be placed upon or transported over the roof deck, sheeting 940 be placed to distribute weight and support such materials. Any damage shall be iffirg-ediately corrected at no cost to the owner. U 1.18, F114'±sHING f1 General 1 , Prior to acceptance of the installation and final payment of the Contract, the — Contractor shall perform the work outlined herein. B. Cleaning 1. Perform cleaning required by the General Section applicable to this Division of the work as the following: a. Clean debris and dirt from panels, junction boxes, etc. C. Operation and Service Manuals 1. Prepare and submit operation and service manuals. The Contractor shall furnish copies of all operations and maintenance manuals organized and bound in one book. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-6 1 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2. One copy of the final equipment submittals shall be included in each of the operation and service manuals. 1.19 TEST AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. B. Prior to acceptance of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner or his designated representatives all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. C. Contractor shall furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions and shall arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives for the system present to assist with the demonstrations. The Owner and Contr for shAI each sign a certification stating that the training has been performed and the wper Accepts same. — - 1 1.20 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION -C r A. Painting p M' 1. Painting of electrical equipment shall be touch -up only of factory fir ii. °• > kn B. Identification 1. Identify panels, switchgear, starters, and switches with engraved nameplates. Provide black nameplates for normal power equipment. 2. Provide typed panel schedules in plastic pouches. 3. Identify fire alarm junction boxes with the letter "FA" in 2" red stenciled letters. 1.21 PRODUCT AND PERFORMANCE QUALITY AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. All materials shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product, and where more than one unit is required of the item, all shall be of the same manufacturer. B. Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specifications. C. If specific products of more than one manufacturer are specified, the choice of these shall be made optional with the Contractor. D. All materials are subject to approval by the Engineer both before and after incorporation in the building. " BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-7 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project ' Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Should suppliers of materials not specified wish to bid their material as a base bid equal, they shall secure the written approval of the Engineer that their product is acceptable as an equal to that specified at least ten (10) days in advance of the bid date to have their products covered in an Addendum prior to opening of bids. F. The Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval on equipment which does not meet the specification in his opinion, or on equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Engineer further reserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable. G. All materials and equipment shall be fully guaranteed by the Contractor to be free from defects and to be new equipment; no second -hand, used, or salvaged equipment will be allowed. Replacement of any part which fails within one year from the date of acceptance shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. Any materials not conforming to the specification will be ordered removed any time during the course of construction, and the Contractor shall replace such items, when notified, at his own expense. H. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. I. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid to the Contractor, but where discrepancies arise, the greater number Un shall govern. Ln ©L Lt twill be the Contractor's responsibility to examine fully the drawings and specifications, to 4a6 his own measurements where required, to verify dimensions and to fit his own work !J�Ja the schedule of other contractors, and to progress the contract as expeditiously as ''116-9sible, so that the progress of the work is orderly and does not occasion excessive ', ctking and patching of this new structure. This Contractor shall be pecuniarily I, responsible for the cutting and patching of the structure occasioned by failure to install cloves, or other items required by the electrical work at the proper time for the normal installation of such items. Rough -in dimensions and locations shall be verified with the Owner or supplier of equipment furnished by others prior to the time of roughing -in. K. The Contractor shall examine fully the plans and specifications of all other contractors on the job to coordinate the installation of his work with that of other contractors. L. The Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between the piping and equipment of the various contractors. Conflicts between the drawings and specifications, or between requirements set forth for the various trades shall be called to the attention of the Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor has submitted his bid in conformance with plans and specifications as issued. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-8 1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.22 COORDINATION Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate his work with all other trades prior to installation. Some spaces are extremely tight and shall require careful cooperation. B. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid to the Contractor but where discrepancies arise, the greater number shall govern. C. Where the specifications state that equipment shall be "furnished ", "installed ", or "provided ", it shall be understood to mean this Contractor shall furnish and install completely unless it is specifically stated that the equipment is to be furnished and /or installed by others. _ F µ 0 1.23 EXISTING SERVICE 0 A. If existing services are encountered in work, protect, brace, and support ewstingcactive sewers, gas, electric, or other services where required for the proper exz , iono the.. work. If existing active services are encountered that require relocation, m wregmst to, —, proper authorities for determination of procedure. Do not prevent or distur 8�era*n of active services that are to remain. > �^ 1.24 TEMPORARY SHUTDOWNS OR ABANDONED SERVICES "" A. Where work makes temporary shutdowns or need to abandon unavoidable, Contractor shall consult with the Owner as to times and procedures for such shutdowns. Work required after normal working hours will be done without extra cost to the Owner. Where existing services are to be abandoned, wiring shall be removed and conduit shall be properly capped in conformance with requirements of the utility. 1.25 SITE A. The site shall be kept orderly and clean at all times during the construction and the storing of materials shall be in accordance with the wishes of the Owner in areas designated for that purpose. At the conclusion of the construction, the site shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rubble, debris and unused materials and shall be left in good order. All tunnels, chases or closed off spaces shall be cleaned of all waste materials, wood frame members, etc. used in construction. 1.26 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. All contractors shall familiarize themselves with the site and with any conditions of the site and /or existing buildings which might present unusual aspects to the work involved. Contractor shall verify all aspects of electrical work, insofar as is possible, check routes of conduit indicated, verifying clearances and other obstacles which might influence the construction proposed. No extras can be allowed on work occasioned by the Contractor's failure to make this inspection. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS a 16010-9 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.27 NOISE AND VIBRATION r Iowa City Police Storage Project , Iowa City, Iowa A. Electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration as determined by the Engineer. If such objectionable noise or vibration should be produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus, conduit, ducts or other parts for the electrical work, make necessary changes and additions, as approved, without extra cost to the Owner. 1.28 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Erect equipment in neat and workmanlike manner, align, level and adjust for satisfactory operation, install so that connecting and disconnecting parts can be made readily and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation and maintenance. 1.29 APPLICATIONS A. Where applications are required for the procuring of utility service to the building, this Contractor shall see that such application is properly filed with the utility and that all information required for such an application is presented to the extent and in the form required by the utility company. 1.30 AS BUILT UTILITIES DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to Engineer a drawing showing the exact location of all underground electrical conduit runs. Drawing shall give accurate location dimensions of all such equipment for future use by the Owner. This drawing shall be submitted as soon as piping has been installed and no payment for work will be authorized prior to such submittal. 1.31 REFERENCES �4. All referenced to "Engineer" of "Architect" shall be presentative duly appointed to supervise the project. Z2 U i END OF SECTION 16010 interpreted to mean Owner's BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-10 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 4Y "' A. Section Includes LID 1. Electrical demolition. %J era PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of this Section. °" MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets boxes which are not removed. F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. 3.(2 CLEANING AND REPAIR c�. . 'n -A. F ian and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. UU- `PIthelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. a R41ace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. tr ide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. r p 3.04'-, INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment as provided on the drawings. END OF SECTION 16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-2 1 Iii it Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Section Includes' 1. Metal conduit. 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 4. Electrical metallic tubing. 5. Nonmetallic conduit. -- B. Related Sections > 1. Section 16130 - Boxes. 2. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 3. Section 16450 - Grounding and Bonding. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI /NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. CONDUIT 16111-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project t Iowa City, Iowa C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.05 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of purchase. 1.07 START -UP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 -1/2 inches. PART 2,,#-, 1'2ODUCTS `a — 2.01 - MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIALS p -0 �k� _.A . n�scription iiiis section includes material to be used to protect electrical wiring in exposed, concealed, and underground applications. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit. 2. Vaw of America. 3. Traingle PWC Inc.. 4. Anamet Inc. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. CONDUIT 16111-2 1 PPR Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carol Cable Co. 2. Anamet Inc. 3. Eletroflex. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction. - 6- C. Fittings: ANSI /NEMA FB 1. r1l 2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT' A. Manufacturers: 1. Electriflex. 2. Carol Cable. 3. Raco Inc. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: ANSI /NEMA FB 1. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit. 2. Triangle PWC. 3. Imperial Pipe & Supply. 4. Approved equal. B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Die cast set screw type. 2.06 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. 2. Endot Ind. 3. Approved equal. B. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with fittings and conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3. CONDUIT 16111-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Iowa City Police Storage Project t Iowa City, Iowa A. Verify surface is ready for conduit installation. B. Examine conduit to verify that it is free from damage. C. Examine conduit to verify it is free of foreign objects. D. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." E. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. G. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190. H. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports 1. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires or ceiling grid. UIN ur �T&Inge conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. .-- 0 UJI 1 �*e exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. iJ.r Rome conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. M, Roue conduit in and under slab from point -to- point. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. Q. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. �I CONDUIT 16111-4 1 L � Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90- degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one -shot bender to fabricate elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. S. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control and expansion joints. T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. ,.,: E3 4.. U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt antf-- r4ioistucg. u; r T_ V. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16450. - 3.02 PREPARATION r' r ...p A. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. > B. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. 3.03 EXECUTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATIONS A. Use only specified raceway in the following locations: 1. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit. Use threaded or raintight fittings. 2. Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Use threaded or raintight fittings for metal conduit. 3. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 4. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 5. Flexible metal conduit may be used: a. Lighting fixture leads, within buildings, less than 6 feet from a junction box, when not subject to moisture. 6. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit shall be used: a. Motor and equipment leads, indoors, or out, less than 6 feet from disconnect. B. Type MC cable and electrical non - metallic tubing are specifically prohibited. C. Size raceways for conductor type installed or for type THW conductors, whichever is larger. 1. Minimum size conduit — 3/4 ". 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. CONDUIT Flaw pq 16111-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa C. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. 3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods suitable to the Engineer. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. C. All penetrations of corridor walls and rated fire and smoke walls shall be conduit. All penetrations shall be filled with fire stopping material. END OF SECTION 16111 Ln Lr1k z J W 1..1 ca•._ n CONDUIT 16111-6 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes <W - 1. Building wire and cable. B. Related Sections 1. Section 16111 - Conduit. 1.02 REFERENCES > are A. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. C. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purposes specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site. B. Accept wires and cables on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect wires and cables from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. WIRES AND CABLES 16120-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.06 WARRANTY Iowa City Police Storage Project 1 Iowa City, Iowa A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of purchase. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIAL A. Description: Copper stranded conductor, with 600V insulation. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Triangle. 2. Carroll. 3. Cablec. 2.02 BUILDING WIRE A. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW. B. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN, XHHW. 6 and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, solid conductor. irk Cciitrol Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN, 1 2.04-0 G.F^.OR DS U- X (14r sistant thermoset insulated multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grcnding conductor, suitable for hard usage in damp locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building is physically protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed. WIRES AND CABLES 16120 -2 1 t IiW Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify conduit systems are ready to accept cables. B. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.03 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATIONS F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceway. G. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 125 feet. Use no wire smaller than 10 AWG for theatrical lighting circuits. H. Colors shall be assigned to each phase conductor as described herein and shall be carried throughout the distribution system. 208/120 System White (Neutral), Black (Phase A) Red (Phase B), Blue (Phase C) 480/277 System Natural Gray (Neutral), Brown (Phase A) Orange (Phase B), Yellow (Phase C) Other colors may be used on a circuit phase where the circuit is divided with more than one switch control. White shall be used for the neutral conductor only. Grounding conductors shall have a green color. No other conductors shall be allowed in green except grounds. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through No. 8, conductors No. 6 and larger shall have black insulation but shall be phase color coded with 1/2 inch band of colored tape at all junctions and terminations. WIRES AND CABLES on 16120-3 A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway. � -5 it B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway. C C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway. --' E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways. ,` 1-n F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceway. G. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 125 feet. Use no wire smaller than 10 AWG for theatrical lighting circuits. H. Colors shall be assigned to each phase conductor as described herein and shall be carried throughout the distribution system. 208/120 System White (Neutral), Black (Phase A) Red (Phase B), Blue (Phase C) 480/277 System Natural Gray (Neutral), Brown (Phase A) Orange (Phase B), Yellow (Phase C) Other colors may be used on a circuit phase where the circuit is divided with more than one switch control. White shall be used for the neutral conductor only. Grounding conductors shall have a green color. No other conductors shall be allowed in green except grounds. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through No. 8, conductors No. 6 and larger shall have black insulation but shall be phase color coded with 1/2 inch band of colored tape at all junctions and terminations. WIRES AND CABLES on 16120-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Panelboards and switchboard feeder cables shall be Meggered to verify the insulation was not damaged during installation. B. Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. C. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. D. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. E. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. F. Provide separate neutral conductors for all dimmed lighting circuits. G. Provide separate neutral conductors where indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES 16120-4 cn <* ay 1; cl r. .p 0 WIRES AND CABLES 16120-4 i L L P" L r IN Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16130 BOXES Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1 - GENERAL r ^.l 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. s 71 B. Pull and junction boxes. C. Cast -in -place floor boxes. r"•, , w ; ; 10 > �,n 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI /NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. B. ANSI /NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. C. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough -in. BOXES 16130-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI /NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 2.03 FLOOR BOXES A. Cast iron floor boxes as scheduled on drawing for slab on grade installations. B. Sheet meal floor boxes as scheduled on drawing for above grade installations. PAPbT, 3 - EX,,FCUTION 3.01 tIStALLATION w A;, 11 electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire puffing, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. Ifastall electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance. C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. F. Align adjacent wall- mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each other. BOXES 16130-2 { Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas. H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back -to -back in walls; provide minimum 6 inch separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectivd ss. L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. Pr N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connectE@ lb twa'iigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. > O. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations and wet locations. R. Verify locations of floor boxes with Architect prior to rough -in. Do not dimension electrical drawings. S. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in any dimension. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosures. 2. Other Locations: Use surface- mounted cast metal box. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box. B. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors. C. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes. BOXES �i 16130-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan. F. Install boxes for security equipment and bank equipment as located on the plans. Coordinate final size and location with security equipment and bank equipment suppliers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material. B. Adjust flush- mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closure in unused box opening. END OF SECTION 16130 BOXES 16130-4 cn Ur, Hw C) BOXES 16130-4 OR �r w 0" im Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1.01 SUMMARY e A. Section Includes ,= 1. Wall switches. , 4; 2. Wall box dimmers. .; C"' G, 3. Receptacles. 4. Device plates and decorative box covers. j 5. Poke throughs.r > v, B. Related Sections 1. Section 16130 - Boxes. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. 2. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, operation and installation of product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. B. Conform to requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. WIRING DEVICES 16141-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Store wiring devices in a dry location. B. Store in such a manner that the wiring devices will not be damaged. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIALS A. Description: Wiring devices including receptacles, switches, dimmers, and cover plates. B. Approved Manufacturer 1. Leviton. 2. Pass & Seymour. 3. Hubbell. 4. Thomas and Betts. 5. Lutron. 6. Lightolier. 7. Approved equal. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. All areas (toggle style). 1. Single Pole Switch: a. Leviton 20A, Model 1221 -2. b. Leviton, 30A, Model 3031 -2. 2'<� Three -way Switch: a. Leviton 20A, Model 1223 -2. b. Leviton 30A, Model 3033 -2. ! ° Four -way Switch: a. Leviton 20A, Model 1224 -2. Two Pole Switch: a. Leviton 20A, Model 1222 -2. a.> b. Leviton 30A, Model 3032 -21. ` 5. Pilot Light Switch: a. Leviton, 20 amp, Model #1221 -PL, Red Light. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. Finished areas, and surface mounted locations — Industrial specification grade. 1. Single Convenience Receptacle: a. Leviton 20A, Model 5261. 2. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: a. Leviton 20A, Model 5262. G WIRING DEVICES 16141-2 1 0 Irm Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 16 3. GFCI Receptacle: a. Leviton 20A, Model 6899. PA 2.04 DEVICE COLOR p A. Match building standard. 2.05 DEVICE COVER PLATE A. Coverplates shall be nylon, color to match device. C7 X ° r(ry B. Interior Surface Mounted Locations In Unfinished Areas: Steel, raised type cdvbr to match box. C. Exterior Locations Marked 'WP — IN USE': Weatherproof cast metal coverplate with gasketed device cover which maintain weatherproof integrity when in use. Hubbell model WP8M or WP8MH. D. Exterior Locations Marked 'WP': Weatherproof cast metal coverplate with gasketed cover. E. Receptacles connected to load terminals of a GFI receptacle shall have a engraved coverplate marked "GFCI PROTECTED ". Stickers or labels are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify floor boxes are adjusted properly. D. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.03 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. WIRING DEVICES IN 16141-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor per detail. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. I. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. K. Install receptacles on roofs within 25 feet of all roof mounted equipment in accordance with the NEC. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect each wiring device for defects. -rate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. G� Moft that each receptacle device is energized. I tesE each receptacle device for proper polarity. 4 0 Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on Drawings. Refer to architectural elevations. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. WIRING DEVICES 16141-4 P, I C r. Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430-J Iowa City, Iowa D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter. E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. WIRING DEVICES END OF SECTION 16141 0 > -:0 > 4-n NJ 16141-5 e �w Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Conform to requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Metallic and components shall be inspected for damage and physical defects. B. Metallic and components shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIALS A. Description: Steel channel, fittings, and anchors used to support various electrical devices and equipment racks. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1 err' 6 A. Section Includes 1. Conduit and equipment supports. n. 2. Anchors and fasteners. c _ ` a, 1.02 REFERENCES r;l --- --, A. NECA - National Contractors Association. Q � > +n N B. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Metallic and components shall be inspected for damage and physical defects. B. Metallic and components shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIALS A. Description: Steel channel, fittings, and anchors used to support various electrical devices and equipment racks. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1 err' 6 D. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. E. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors. She Metal: Use sheet metal screws. d- *ad Elements: Use wood screws. L!J LLJ —'AR' 3 - ECUTION LL 3.01 w' EXAMINATION A. Verify wall, ceiling, and rafters are suitable to accept steel channel and anchors. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify all channels, fasteners, anchors and miscellaneous as suitable for the application. 3.03 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATIONS A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-2 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Approved Manufacturers 1. Unistrut. 2. Kindorf. 3. Approved equal. 2.02 STEEL CHANNEL A. Description: Galvanized steel. 1. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. 2. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. 2.03 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS A. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system, expansion anchors. B. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. C. Concrete Surfaces: Use self - drilling anchors and expansion anchors. D. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. E. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors. She Metal: Use sheet metal screws. d- *ad Elements: Use wood screws. L!J LLJ —'AR' 3 - ECUTION LL 3.01 w' EXAMINATION A. Verify wall, ceiling, and rafters are suitable to accept steel channel and anchors. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify all channels, fasteners, anchors and miscellaneous as suitable for the application. 3.03 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATIONS A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-2 5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation ". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder- actuated anchors. F. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidit►. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. H. Install surface - mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four orS' " I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets aria 66elboard. rl one inch off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. °`' 3.04 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify all supports are securely anchored and fastened. B. Verify all supports are level and square. SUPPORTING DEVICES END OF SECTION 16190 16190-3 �r a' ;F t 61 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16440 DISCONNECTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Section Includes Q 1. Disconnect Switches. - B. Related Work 1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 2. Section 16475 - Overcurrent Protective Devices. 1.02 �° REFERENCES ;K > �s A. av NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, ampacity, integrated short circuit, arrangement and size of disconnect switches. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified. D. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. E. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. DISCONNECTS 16440-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect products from weather and moisture by covering with heavy plastic or canvas and by maintaining heating within enclosure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Record actual locations of Products. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of purchase. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.09 START -UP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING A. Verify operation of all equipment. B. Demonstrate operation of equipment to Owner's representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.Og MOUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIAL cription: Disconnect switches for 600V and below. a B, I 4 �.— roved manufactures 1: t.- General Electric. Z ° Square D. Cutler Hammer. 4. Approved equal. DISCONNECTS 16440-2 L 70 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -1 2.02 DISCONNECTS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. Disconnects used as service, feeder, branch circuit disconnects and motor disconnects shall be NEMA KS 1, heavy duty, quick -make, quick- break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. B. For motors rated 125v, 1/2 hp or less with surface mounted branch circuit runs, the disconnect shall be Bussman type SRU for plug -in type equipment, and Bussman type SSU for direct connect type equipment. Fuse size shall be based on the current requirements of the equipment. C. For motors rated 125v, 1/2 hp or less with concealed branch circuit runs, the disconnect shall be Bussman type SRY for plug -in type equipment, and Bussman type SSY for direct connect type equipment. Fuse size shall be based on the current requirements of the equipment. D. Indoor locations installations enclosure to be NEMA 1, outdoor or wet location installation enclosure to be NEMA 3R. E. Disconnects designated 'NF' on the drawings to be non - fused. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION : r- rri A. Verify surface as ready to accept disconnects. ¢ -�o > �n 3.02 PREPARATION NJ A. Review manufacturer installation and mounting recommendations. 3.03 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATIONS A. Install disconnects as designated on the drawings. B. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections. END OF SECTION 16440 DISCONNECTS err" 16440-3 '0 im Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Equipment grounding conductors. ' =a B. Related Sections = - 1. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices. C -� 2. Section 16500 - Lighting. == .) er . 1.02 REFERENCES r '0 A. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. > In ry PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATIONS A. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. B. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible conduit, or nonmetallic rigid conduit shall not be permitted to be used as a grounding conductor. In all cases where flexible metallic conduit, liquidtight flexible conduit, or nonmetallic rigid conduit is used, a green wire ground conductor shall be provided with the phase conductors in the conduit. This green wire ground conductor shall be used to provide ground continuity between the equipment or device and the metallic conduit raceway system. C. Provide a separate "green wire" equipment ground conductor for each branch circuit to a motor, and /or each branch circuit originating from a panelboard. This ground shall be used to ground the device or load fed, and shall be bonded to all components of the raceway system, such as junction boxes, starter or disconnect switch enclosures, equipment cases, etc. The green wire equipment grounding conductor shall terminate in the panel board at the green wire equipment grounding bus. Ground conductors for branch circuits shall be of size indicated in NEC, table 250 -95, except minimum size ground conductor shall be #12 AWG. D. Each branch feeder originating at the switchboard shall have a green wire equipment grounding conductor, originating at the green wire ground bus in the panelboard. This green wire ground conductor shall be of size indicated except in no instance small than #8 AWG. GROUNDING AND BONDING 0, 16450-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa E. The green wire equipment grounding conductor is in addition to the neutral conductor, and in no case shall the neutral conductor serve as the grounding means. F. All bonding connections shall be made on surfaces which have been cleaned of all paint, dirt, oil, etc., so that connections are bar metal to bar metal contact. All ground connections shall be tight, shall be impossible to move, and shall be made with UL listed grounding devices, fittings, bushings, etc. G. Multiple conductors in a single lug not permitted. Each grounding conductor shall terminate in its own terminal lug. H. All conduit sleeves shall be furnished with ground bushings and bonded to the adjacent cable tray, telecommunication main grounding busbar (TMGB) with #6 AWG. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. END OF SECTION 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-2 a -y -> C E s _ 3: W1' - GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-2 �r 1�r j k FRO im L L F" iw r� L rr Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY' A. Section Includes 1. Molded Case Circuit Breakers. � 2. Fuses.; B. Related Sections aq 1. Section 16470 - Distribution and Branch Circuit Panelboards. 2. Section 16440 - Disconnects NJ 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge fuses. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, let through current for circuit breaker and fuses. B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time - current curves. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa D. Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement. E. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section. D. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. E. Furnish products listed and classified Underwriters Laboratories, .Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Metallic and components shall be inspected for damage and physical defects. B. Metallic and components shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommenda- tions. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.0kV MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIAL ;description: 600V rated overcurrent device including molded case circuit breaker and LLI; #uses. Bt ;A " roved Manufacturers PP 4# �' Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0 a. General Electric. b. Square D. C. Cutler Hammer. d. Approved equal. 2. Fuses a. Bussmann. b. Littlefuse. C. Gould Shawmut d. Approved equal. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-2 0 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 2.02 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. 600V rating. Provide circuit breakers with current rating and interrupting capability as listed on the panelboard schedule. B. Provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnet, trip im.pach pole. f C. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equi6ii Ent branch circuits. D. Circuit breakers used as switches in lighting circuits shall be listed as typeSW D. M� E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: NEMA AB 1. P ovide quit breakers with replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole as scheduled. F. Provide circuit breakers with 120 VAC shunt trip as indicated on the drawings. G. Multi -pole circuit breakers shall have a common trip. Provide multi -pole circuit breakers for multi -wire branch circuits sharing a common neutral. 2.03 FUSES A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase -to -phase voltage. C. Main Service Switches and Branch Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay), current limiting, Buss KRP -C. D. Branch switches 30 -600 amperes: Buss LPN -RK E. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Buss LPN -RK (250 VAC) LPS -RK (600 VAC) F. Motors 1/2 HP or Less: Single phase, 125 volt or less, Fusetron Type T plug fuse. 2.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide spare circuit breakers as listed on the panelboard schedule. B. Provide two fuse pullers. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-3 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that panel board enclosure and disconnects are suitable for overcurrent device installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify all disconnects and circuit breakers are in their off position. 3.03 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATION A. Install circuit breakers as listed in the panelboard schedule. B. Install circuit breakers and fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. D. Install spare fuse cabinet where indicated by the engineer. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers and fuses. 3.05 SCHEDULES ;. See panelboard schedules, and electrical one -line diagram for individual circuit breaker an fuse requirements 12J END OF SECTION 16475 Via.. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-4 frrrr r r: pop w- 1i "" 1 x Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16500 LIGHTING W, ;Ai C1z1z1: 1 Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Luminaires and lampholders. ~� 2. Lamps. c 3. Ballasts. ` r 4. Exit Signs. 5. Emergency lighting units. t rt B. Related Sections N 1. Section 16130 - Boxes 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High- Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High - Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction details for Products. B. Product Data: Provide product data for each lamp, luminaire and lighting unit. C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide maintenance and operating instructions for battery powered lighting units. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. LIGHTING 16500-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J 1.05 0 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of purchase. 1.07 START -UP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING A. Verify operation of all equipment. B. Demonstrate operation of equipment to Owner's representative. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIALS A. Description: This section contains information pertaining to luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and poles for interior and exterior locations. B. Approved manufacturers. 1. Luminaire Schedule: Product requirements for each luminaire and lampholder are specified in luminaire schedule on drawings. 2. Manufacturers: As scheduled, noted on schedule, or approved equal. te'- 9.02.,.. LW@NAIRES AND LAMPHOLDERS .... --:c G a Ao Accessories: Provide required accessories for mounting and operation of each luminaire ' as- indicated. 1' == <Recessed Luminaires: Provide trim type suitable for ceiling system in which r �luminaire is installed. 2 -- Thermal Protection: Provide thermal protection devices to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 3. Surface Luminaires: Provide spacers and brackets required for mounting. 4. Pendant Luminaires: Provide swivel hangers, pendant rods, tubes, and chains as indicated to install luminaire at appropriate height. 2.03 EXIT SIGNS A. Description: Exit sign fixture. 1. Lamps: LED. LIGHTING E L L: 16500-2 1 P, e Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa B. Emergency Power Supply: Integral, listed for emergency lighting use. 1. Battery: Nickel- cadmium type. 2. Battery Charger: Dual -rate type. 3. Indicators and Controls: AC ON; TEST switch. 2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Self- contained emergency lighting unit. 1. Input Voltage: 120 or 277 volts. 2. Battery: Lead calcium type. 3. Battery Charger: Dual -rate type. C << B. Indicators and Controls: AC ON, RECHARGING; TEST switch. C. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection. u'''��qi E `. Y Y i 2.05 LAMPS; A. Manufacturers: '' N 1. Sylvania. 2. General Electric. 3. Phillips. 4. Approved equal B. Description: 1. Incandescent Lamps: 130 volts, shape and color as scheduled. 2. Fluorescent Lamps: 3500k Type and color as scheduled. Low mercury. 3. Metal Halide HID Lamps: As recommended by fixture manufacturer. 4. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: Conform to ANSI C78.379. 2.06 BALLASTS A. Approved manufacturer. 1. Magnetek. 2. Osram - Sylvania. 3. Motorola. 4. Advanced. 5. Approved equal. B. Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Description: Electronic Type 10% THD or lower. 2. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified. 3. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. 4. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. PF" LIGHTING iW r iw 16500-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J C. Fluorescent Dimming Ballast 1. Description: Electronic type 10% THD or lower. 2. Provide ballast suitable for the lamps specified. 3. Ballasts are to provide 1 % to 100% dimming. 4. 0 to 10 volt control signal. 5. Ballast shall be compatible with control system. Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa D. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballast: 1. Description: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast. 2. Provide ballast suitable for lamp specified. 3. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine adjacent surfaces to determine that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Review manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 EXECUTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATIONS A. Install luminaires and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 1. Provide pendant accessory to mount suspended luminaires and exit signs at height ZZ indicated. Use swivel hanger on sloped ceilings. 2. i� Support surface- mounted luminaires from ceiling grid tee structure; provide auxiliary O support laid across top of ceiling tees. Fasten to prohibit movement. 3.1 Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Use plaster frames. Install grid clips. 4-�_ v Install lamps in luminaires and lampholders. r 5. :: < Support suspended luminaires from structure as recommended by the manufacturer. 0 B. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants or aircraft cable supported from the structure. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. D. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. E. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. L 17 L LIGHTING 16500-4 1 C t I" libi Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa low F. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. G. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. H. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. I. Install clips to secure recessed grid - supported luminaires in place. J. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on drawings. K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. L. Connect luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs to branch circuit outleusing flexible conduit.) M. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulatiJ9' q,suitable fob temperature conditions within luminaire. w. c N. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment groundi0'oncctor. O. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. > �r+ w P. Verify exit sign mounting and orientation prior to ordering fixture. Q. Provide 12 spare lamps for each shape, color and wattage installed. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. B. Aim adjustable luminaires and lampholders as indicated or as directed. C. Adjust directional arrows on exit signs to meet approval of authority having jurisdiction. D. Clean paint splatters, fingerprints, dirt and debris from installed luminaires. E. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. F. Replace broken or cracked lenses at completion of work. END OF SECTION 16500 W, LIGHTING t r 16500-5 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J PART 1 GENERAL Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 16740 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT SYSTEM 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install empty conduit system(s) as required by the Drawings and this Section for the following: 1. Telecommunications (telephone and data). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16111 —Conduit 0- rm B. Section 16130 — Boxes. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description: Empty conduit systems for Owner to installed low voltage wiring. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Conduits and Outlets for Telecommunications (Telephone and /or Data), Closed Circuit Televisions and Security. 1. Provide conduits as may be required for the installation of telecommunications outlets indicated on the drawings, and specified herein. Conduits shall meet same basic material and workmanship specifications as other conduit systems on the project. 2. Telecommunications outlets shall be 4" x 4" x 2-1/8" deep square outlet box, single - gang plaster ring cover, and blank coverplate. These shall be located same height above floor as convenience outlets in the same room, i.e., at 16" above finished floor. Where wall phones are indicated, outlets to be 4" square box, 54" above the finished floor, single -gang plaster ring and blank cover - plate. 3. From each telecommunications outlet extend one(1) 3/4" empty conduit with pull string to the pull box designated on the drawings or as directed. Ganging of telecommunications outlets on a common stub -out conduit shall be prohibited. 4. For floor outlets. Empty conduit stub -out from floor outlets shall be same as wall outlets, unless a larger conduit size is indicated on the drawings. MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT SYSTEM q 16740-1 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install conduits as specified in this section and as required under Section 16110, Conduit. B. Owner or their service vendors under separate contracts will furnish and install all telephone, computer, and television wire and cable, and related connections. END OF SECTION 16740 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT SYSTEM 16740-2 :. 0 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT SYSTEM 16740-2 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J SECTION 16852 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Fire alarm control panels. 2. Remote annunciator panel. 3. Manual fire alarm stations. 4. Automatic smoke and heat detectors. .. 5. Fire alarm signaling appliances. - 6. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. B Related Sections 1. Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. ..9 2. Section 16111 — Conduit. > w 3. Section 16120 — Wires and Cables. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NFPA 72 - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Protective Signalling Systems. C. Uniform Fire Code. D. Uniform Building Code. E. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, manual and automatic fire alarm system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a NICET Level III Technician. The technician's name and a copy of his/her NICET Certificate shall be included. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawing shall include riser diagram drawing, and fire alarm plan drawing. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16852-1 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 1. Riser diagram drawing shall indicate the following: a. All added smoke detectors, indicating devices and door releases. C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connections requirements. D. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products. F. Operation Data: Operating instructions. G. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures. H. Record Drawings: Shop drawings are to be updated with "As-Built" information. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum one year experience. C. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 72, and NFPA 101. D Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indkated. a; ,, f X1.06, 'Dj DVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING UJ .. H AP Sfft fire alarm system components in a dry location. 9 L Oect fire alarm system components from dust. 1.07 ,'Y WARRANTY A. All equipment shall be warranted against defects in manufacturing for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year from the Date of Substantial Completion. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16852-2 1 l Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Ow 1.09 SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa A. System startup and programming shall be by a factory authorized technician. P" 1.10 STARTUP COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING A. Record actual locations of initiating devices, signalling appliances, and addresses of individual devices. B. Demonstrate system functions and operation to owner's representatives and Fire Department personnel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNIT(S) OR MATERIALS Ca A. Description: 1. The existing ADT /Notifier addressable fire alarm system is to b6- 36tended arid— modified as indicated on the drawings. ;` °- , _ r�n J B. Manufacturers — Fire Alarm System a 1. Notifier, Midwest Alarm Services, (319) 362 -3625. � 2. Engineer approved equal. �' w 2.02 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION CONTROL PANEL A. Control Panel: Existing ADT /Notifier to remain. B. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Existing alarm sequence to remain unchanged. C. Door Release Operation: Magnetically held doors shall release on general alarm. 2.03 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES A. Initiating Devices 1. Horn /strobe to match building standard. 2. Strobe to match building standard. B. Smoke Detectors: 1. Match building standard. 2.04 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: #12 AWG building wire as Section 16120. B. Initiating Device Circuits: #18 AWG (minimum) twisted shielded cable as recommended by fire alarm manufacturers. Wire gauge is to be determined by voltage drop calculations. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM F 16852-3 Howard R. Green Company Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City Police Storage Project Iowa City, Iowa C. Auxiliary Power Circuits: #12 building wire as specified in Section 16120. Conductor colors to be red ( +), black ( -). D. All fire alarm cable is to have a red jacket and installed in conduit. Fire alarm conduit system shall be separate from all other conduit systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify fire alarm system components are free of physical damage. B. Verify quantities of field devices and miscellaneous components. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify all dust covers on field detection devices. 3.03 EXECUTION /INSTALLATION /APPLICATIONS A. Install fire alarm cable in conduit. B. The fire alarm shall remain operational at all times. Any work requiring the fire alarm to be disabled shall be coordinated with the owner and shall not exceed 2- hours. C. Provide all system programming required for a complete operational system. D`.`.� Sup* and install initiating devices per drawings. Device placement shall be in aance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's requirements. E,Q In J products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .- J Bond- the initiating device cable shield to ground only at the fire alarm control panel. Ift4ate all splices and taps with heat shrink tubing. 0 3.04 ` INTERFACING WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT A. The general contractor will provide door hold devices. Coordinate rough in and installation requirements. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed. B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72H and local fire department requirements. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM U 16852-4 1 f'. FP- fin I` illrl e•* i ir. Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa 3.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems. B. Include services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing and certification. Technician shall be NICET Level III. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration to staff. B. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each. 3.08 TESTING A. The manufacturers authorized representative shall perform a quality inspection of the final installation and in the presence of the Contractor, Architect, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and local code and fire authorities, shall perform a complete finished test of all aspects of the system. A system certification verifying the proper system operation shall be required prior to acceptance. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM END OF SECTION 16852 0 ...f � ol fi. li 1 3 4: r `l? > W 16852-5 Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 16902 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES U -3 A. Clock timers., ski ` r C7- B. Occupancy sensor. rn 1.02 REFERENCES > tin A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. D. NEMA ST 1 - Standard for Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type.) E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each component showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS 16902-1 J Howard R. Green Company Iowa City Police Storage Project Project No. 529430 -J Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TIMER SWITCH A. Approved Manufactures: Wattstopper, Leviton, Hubbell. B. Wattstopper Model TS400, flash warning. 2.03 OCCUPANCY SENSOR A. Approved Manufactures: Leviton, Watt Stopper, Hubbell. B. Refer to schedule on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make electrical wiring interconnections as indicated. C. Demonstrate operation and programming to Owner. END OF SECTION 16902 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS 16902-2 L." a, 0 'Enan. ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS 16902-2